WR - RES/19-20

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
REV 00 – AUGUST. 2024

CLIENT: H.E. Dr. KHALID MOHAMED A AL-ATTIYAH

PROPOSED 3B+G+26 FLOOR

RESIDENTIAL TWIN TOWERS
ON PLOT WR - RES/19-20
LUSAIL, DOHA, QATAR
 Table Of contents

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. 7
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
PART 4: APPROVED PRODUCTS
260100 SCHEDULE FOR APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT 10
260519 CABLES AND SMALL WIRING 6
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
260526 EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
260533 CODUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES 8
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
260536 CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES 5
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 3
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
261200 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER AND ACCESSORIES 5
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
262300 LV FACTORY BUILD ASSEMBLIES 8
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Table of Contents - Page 1 of 4
 Table Of contents

262413 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES. 4

PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
262416 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND DEVICES. 5
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS 5
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
262726 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER 6
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
263213 STANDBY DISESL GENERATOR SET 9
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: EXECUTION
263323 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 5
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
263353 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 5
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS 4
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
263600 TRANSFER SWITCH 3
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION 3
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Table of Contents - Page 2 of 4
 Table Of contents

265100 LIGHT FIXTURE AND ACCESSORIES. 7

PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATION

270526 EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELV SYSTEMS 2

PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION

271100 TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 6

PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
274133 CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM 9
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
275116 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM 6
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXAMINATION
275123 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS 7
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXAMINATION
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFTEY AND SECURITY
281300 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 2
PART 1: QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2: DESCRIPTION
PART 3: OPERATION
PART 4: HARDWARE
282100 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM 10
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Table of Contents - Page 3 of 4
 Table Of contents

283111 ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 7

PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION
283173 EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM SYSTEM 6
PART 1: GENERAL
PART 2: PRODUCTS
PART 3: EXECUTION

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Table of Contents - Page 4 of 4
 SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION

SECTION 260000

GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section is to be read in conjunction with relevant items of all sections and drawings issued for this proposed
works.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. In the adoption of standards and requirements, the Contractor shall take the following precedence:
1. Drawings
2. Specification
3. Bill of Item or Quantities (BOQ)
4. Local codes of practice
5. International standards and requirements
6. Engineer’s decision

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. These Specifications cover the following systems that are intended to be used for the Project in accordance with the
Drawings and as directed and approved by the Engineer:
1. Indoor and outdoor Lighting Distribution System
2. Lighting Control System
3. Power Distribution System
4. Standby Generator and Distribution System
5. Earth / Grounding System
6. Fire Alarm and Emergency Lighting Systems
7. Mass notification ( Evacuation ) System
8. Telephone and Communication System
9. Background Music and Public Address System
10. TV System
11. Access control
12. CCTV system
13. INTERCOM
14. Other Misc. System
15. Any related builders work

1.3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by Conditions of Contract & Relevant applicable Sections.

B. The contractor will be deemed to have, prior to tender, studied the full working drawings of project, visited the site and
to have acquainted himself with all relevant details affecting his work.

C. The Contractor shall bring to the Engineers attention, prior to submitting his tender, in writing, any discrepancies
between the Contract Documents and the above, no claims for money or extension of time shall be entertained for such
discrepancies after award of Contract.

D. The work shall include design check, supply, installation, testing, commissioning, adjusting and setting to work.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 00 00 - Page 1 of 7
 SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION

E. By virtue of carrying out a check on the complete design, the contractor is to assume full responsible for the correct
functioning of the system and to carry any liabilities or guarantee as may necessary to protect all parties in this regard.

F. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of all engineering services and liaison work with local authorities for
service connection.

G. Contractor shall include for any items not shown, but required by satisfactory operation of system comply with local
authorities.

H. Coordinate with Structural drawings for exact opening of floors, roof, beam, etc. to Engineer approval.

I. The Contractor contract shall include for client staff training in the Operation and Maintenance of the works.

J. The Contractor contract shall include for promptly rectify defects during the maintenance period.

K. All works of a temporary or permanent nature which are by implication associated with the works specified, and by
accepted standards of good practice and customs of the trades to be employed by the Contractor, and which are
necessary and essential to render the Building Services Installations complete shall also be included in the Tender.

L. Any item not covered in this section shall apply equally and wherever appropriate to any item in any other section of
this Volume.

1.4 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

A. The works shall be installed, tested and commissioned in accordance with latest issue of:
1. Qatar construction standard (QCS).
2. Regulation for Electrical Installations as issued by the Qatar General Electricity and Water Corporation
(QGEWC) Qatar.
3. Regulation for Electrical Installations as issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers (I.E.E).
(for points not included in QGEWC Regulations)
4. National Electrical Code (N.E.C) issued by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
5. Standards relating to Electrical Installations and equipment as issued by International Electromechanical
Commission (I.E.C.) and British Standards Institute (BSI).
6. Chartered Institution of Building Services (CIBS) recommendations.
7. Regulation for Fire Detection System & Life Safety and Mass Notification each to be according NFPA section.
8. Local Fire Authority Regulations issued by Qatar Civil Defense Department (QCDD).
9. Local Telephone Authority Regulation (OOREDOO).
10. General & Technical Specifications of the Security Surveillance System issued by MOI.

B. In case of conflict among the referenced standards and codes, the more stringent provision will govern by engineer
direction.

C. If any redesign or modification of the Works is necessitated by the adoption of another approved code or due to Local
Electrical Authorities or safety instruction requirements, the extra cost incurred (if any) both for redesign and material
shall be borne by the Contractor.

All equipment and materials supplied for this contract shall be manufactured in strict compliance with the latest
relevant recommendations of the IEC, if available. Otherwise they shall comply with the latest relevant Euronorm
specifications unless otherwise specified or approved.

1.5 INTERFERENCE AND ERRONEOUS LOCATIONS

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 00 00 - Page 2 of 7
 SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION

A. The Contractor shall verify on Site all data and final locations of work done under other Sections of these
Specifications, required for arranging the Electrical Works.

B. In case of interference with other works or erroneous locations with respect to equipment or structures, the Contractor
shall supply all labors and materials necessary to complete the work in an acceptable manner.

1.6 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS

A. The Climate of Qatar in the summer months is hot and humid, a humidity of 100% at 30°C has been recorded.

B. All Materials and Electrical Equipment shall be suitable to operate satisfactory for continuous periods in the condition
stated above and under following climatic conditions:-

(i) maximum sun radiation temperature in summer - 84 °C

(ii) maximum ambient temperature in summer - 52 °C
(iii) average max. ambient temperature in summer - 45 °C
(iv) minimum ambient temperature in winter - 0 °C
(v) the altitude of Qatar may be taken as sea level.

1.7 KAHRAMAA REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall attend to and afford all facilities to the KAHRAMAA and shall provide all necessary work to
facilitate all main feeder work.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for foreseeing any requirement as requested by the above mentioned authorities,
and shall follow the Engineer's instructions on Site.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing any workshop drawings concerning transformer rooms, electrical
(meter) rooms, feed-in routings, and shall consult the electrical authorities in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions, to seek the approval of these authorities.

D. The Contractor shall also be responsible for follow up of the application for electrical connection. The application form
shall be filled in by the Contractor who shall follow up with the concerned authorities for final electrical connection to
the project.

1.8 ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Materials and equipment shall be suitable in all respects for operation on electrical systems under following climatic
conditions: -
1. The electrical power system will operate on 415/240volt ± 6% Volt, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz system.
2. The low current systems shall operate on the voltages specified or as recommended by the respective system
manufacturer and the acceptance of the Engineer.

1.9 BUILDER’S WORK

A. The expression ‘Builder’s Work’ shall mean the ancillary work carried out by the Contractor in connection with the
Electro mechanical installation. The Contractor shall submit builders work drawings for approval of Engineer giving
complete information in accordance with the contract program.

B. Details of all foundations for apparatus, construction of ducts, sumps, draw pits, manholes, chases, structural steel
works, cutting away and making good in walls, floors, ceilings, etc., not detailed on tender drawings shall be
responsibility of contractor.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 00 00 - Page 3 of 7
 SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION

C. The priming and painting of ferrous, non-ferrous and timber surfaces whether concealed or exposed.

D. The contractor shall entirely responsible for accuracy of information given for the builders’ work and in accordance
with contract program.

1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES AND OTHER SUBMITTALS

A. The contractor shall submit the sample material, warrantee certificates, shop drawings, manufacturer’s Installation
Instructions, certificate of origin, Product credentials, Tests and Certificates, Field Test Reports.

B. The Contractor shall, upon the request of the Engineer provide plain paper copies of the standards' extracts to which
references are made in the specifications.

C. Two copies of the brochures submitted shall be originals as published by the Manufacturer. Other copies may be clear
plain copies of paper.

D. Submitted brochures shall include at least two copies of Manufacturer's original publications, other copies may be clear
plain copies of paper.

1.11 AS BUILT OR RECORD DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. The contactor shall include Record (As-Built) Drawings with complete wiring diagrams, including complete terminal
strip layout and identification, and wire termination and tagging for all conductors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. All electrical materials and equipment to be used for the project shall be new and shall be manufactured by one of the
manufacturer listed in acceptable manufacturers’ list in relevant section.

B. Materials proposed to be used shall fulfill the requirement like Local availability of spare parts and Local technical
support with factory trained technicians.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates in Arabic and English shall be installed on all devices or pieces of equipment for which the use or
identification may not be readily apparent, such as, but not limited to, starters, relays, contactors, controls,
pushbuttons, indicating lights, switches.

B. Nameplates shall be made of laminated sheet plastic, 3 mm thick, or of anodized aluminum, approximately 1.5 mm
thick, engraved to provide black letters on a white background, and fastened in place with corrosion-resistant
screws, or as specified by local authorities. Name plates for IP55 panels shall be fixed with adhesives.

C. Nameplates shall also be provided on all manufactured assemblies to identify the assembly as well as feeders, circuits,
compartments, switches, internal components, etc.

D. Nameplates shall be located in a position to be easily readable after completion of the installation of the equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 00 00 - Page 4 of 7
 SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall supply all necessary labor and material, and shall install, complete and make ready for use, the
above mentioned systems including the installation and wiring of miscellaneous equipment and devices, as indicated on
the drawings and as herein specified.

B. The Contractor shall carry out the whole of the Electrical works in a workman like and substantial manner and in strict
conformance with the codes, Standards and requirements listed in the following clauses, or approved equal.

C. All equipment and material supplied for this project shall be manufactured in strict compliance with the standards listed
in the following clauses or acceptable equal.

D. If actual ratings of equipment supplied under other sections are different than the values indicated on the Drawings, the
Contractor shall implement all necessary modifications at no extra cost, to the acceptable of the Engineer and as
approved relevant Local Authorities.

3.2 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS

A. The Engineer's Drawings issued with these Specifications are complementary to these Specifications.

B. These Drawings indicate the approximate location of all-electrical devices and equipment. The exact and final location
shall be subject to the prior acceptance of the Engineer on Site.

C. The Contractor shall check Architectural, Structural, Air-Conditioning, Plumbing and any other available Drawings to
avert any possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary to resolve such
conflicts, the Contractor shall secure the Engineer's written permission on necessary adjustments before any installation
work is started.

D. All accessories and appurtenances that the Engineer deems functionally necessary for a complete installation shall be
supplied and installed by the Contractor whether or not explicitly indicated or described, at no extra charge.

E. Discrepancies shown on different Drawings or between Drawings and actual Site conditions, or between Drawings and
Specifications shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for a decision.

3.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall test and commission the works to the approval of the Engineer.

B. The Electrical works shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with the Chartered Institution of Building
Services commissioning codes.

C. The Contractor shall include for the provision of all chemicals and other consumables required for testing,
commissioning and setting to work of each section of the Works.

D. The Contractor shall prepare a list of these consumables giving quantities necessary for each section of the works and
the recommended suppliers.

E. The Contractor shall use an approved independent specialist commissioning engineer for the capital plant and
equipment, under no circumstances the Contractor shall use his own staff for such things.

F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval his “close down” program for the works; the program shall
address the following:
1. Start of testing and commissioning date.
2. Completion of testing and commissioning date
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 00 00 - Page 5 of 7
 SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
3. Date and duration for each plant’s testing and commissioning.
4. Power and Water on date
5. Telephone Service on date

G. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, a detailed method statement for each testing and
commissioning activity before one month of starting T & C along with T & C check list.

H. The contractor shall test the following in general

1. Insulation megger tests on wires & cables
2. Continuity and resistance tests
3. Socket outlets proper wiring tests
4. Operational tests on all electrical equipment
5. Insulation resistance tests of motors, distribution boards and panels
6. Testing of lighting installations
7. Earth loop impedance test for socket outlets
8. Earth resistance measurements test for MV/LV

I. The Engineer shall be notified seven calendar days or more in advance when any test is to take place, and it shall not be
started without his permission.

J. The Contractor shall ensure that he gives the Engineer at least two (2) working days written notice of any tests
requiring witnessing.

K. The Contractor shall maintain written records of all tests. Successful test records shall be counter signed by the
Engineer and bound into the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The Contractor shall provide detailed operation and maintenance draft manual to the Engineer for approval at least two
(2) weeks before the Practical Completion of the project.

B. The Testing and Commissioning results may be subsequently added to the draft manual and shall be retained on site
until the final manuals are approved by the Engineer.

C. The final manuals shall be bound into A4 size plastic ring binders with front covers providing the following
information:
1. Project Title
2. Volume identification
3. Contractors name and address
4. Engineers name and address
5. Completion date
6. Table of contents
7. Contractor’s emergency contact telephone and fax numbers.
8. Record drawing list
9. Detailed description of each system
10. Start up instructions for each system.
11. Shut down instructions for each system.
12. Detailed routine maintenance instructions for each system
13. Blank maintenance log sheets
14. List of suppliers and local agent addresses
15. Schedules of equipment
16. Manufacturer’s operation and maintenance manuals

17. Schedules of manufacturers recommended spares and tools.

18. Testing and commissioning results.
19. Training manual.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 00 00 - Page 6 of 7
 SECTION 26 00 00
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION

3.5 MODIFICATIONS AND CLEANING

A. If during the work, the Contractor wishes to make changes or modifications, then these modifications shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. If these changes result in extra expenses in design and/or material these
expenses shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cleaning of Services, accessories and equipment, which have been supplied
and/or installed as part of the contract to which these general requirements apply. Cleaning shall be undertaken
immediately prior to handover.

3.6 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical equipment shall be protected against mechanical damage and from the weather especially from water
dripping or splashing upon it, at all times during shipment, storage, and construction.

B. Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Where equipment is installed or stored in moist areas, such as unheated
buildings, open spaces, etc., it shall be provided with an acceptable means to prevent the moisture damage. This may be
uniformly distributed source of heat to prevent condensation.

C. Should any equipment or material be subjected to possible damage by water, it shall be dried out thoroughly and put
through a special dielectric test as directed by engineer, at the expense of the Contractor or shall be replaced by the
Contractor without any additional charge.

D. Should any equipment or material be subjected to possible mechanical damage, the Contractor shall repair or replace
the damaged equipment as instructed by the Engineer.

PART 4 - APPROVED PRODUCTS

4.1 Approved Manufacturers

A. The contractor may allow in his tender for alternative manufacturers to those in Clause G below “the Vendor List”.
However all alternative equipment shall have sales, service and spares back-up locally through local supplier within the
Qatar.

B. Where alternative equipment is offered the Contractor shall substantiate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that the
alternative is equivalent or superior in all respects to the specified items. The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the
Contractor to submit the stringent one for approval of specified manufacturers or alternate subject to satisfaction.

C. All similar equipment shall be from one manufacturer as far as possible and standardization of components shall be
utilized to reduce the quantity of spare parts to be held.

D. The contractor shall ensure that the equipment offered can be installed in the spaces provided, with due regard to ease
of maintenance and replacement. The contractor shall also ensure that delivery is suitable for the building program
through specified supplier. Any material or accessories installed at site without written approval by Engineer shall be
replaced with approved one without any additional cost.

E. Where a country of origin is given, this refers to the Head Office in the case of International Corporations. However,
for each product not manufactured in that Country separate approval must be obtained from the Consultant.

F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers included in
section 260100 “SCHEDULE FOR APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT”

END OF SECTION 260000

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 00 00 - Page 7 of 7
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

SECTION 260100
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

260519 CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

 SINGLE CORE AND MULTI-CORE CABLES

1- QICC NEXANS Cables (QATAR)

2- Doha Cables (QATAR)

3- BICC-Ducab (U.K)

4- National Cables (U.K)

OR EQUIVALENT

 MICC CABLES
1- TRM (U.K.)

OR EQUIVALENT

 FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

1- Prysmain (U.K.)

2-Nexans (U.K.)

3-Pentair (USA)

OR EQUIVALENT

 CABLING ACCESSORIES
1-CMP (UK)

2-Raychem RPG Ltd (U.K.)

OR EQUIVALENT

260526 EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1- Axis Electrical Component Ltd (U.K)

2- Furse (U.K)

3-Kingsmill (U.K.)

4-Rychem RPG (U.K.)

OR EQUIVALENT

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 1 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

260533 CONDUIT AND CONDUIT BOXES

 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS

1- Allied (U.S.A)
(For Metal Conduits & Accessories)

2- Wheatland (U.S.A)
(For Metal Conduits & Accessories)

3- Barton (U.K)
(For Metal Conduits & Accessories)

4- Burn Tubes (U.K)

(For Metal Conduits & Accessories)

5- Marshall Tufflex (U.K)

(For P.V.C Conduits & Accessories)

6- EGA Tube / MK (U.K)

(For P.V.C Conduits & Accessories)

7- Clipsal (Italy)
(For P.V.C Conduits & Accessories)

8- Thomas & Betts (U.S.A)

(For Steel Back Boxes)

9- Steel City (U.S.A)

(For Steel Back Boxes)

OR EQUIVALENT

 FIRE STOP MATERIAL

1- Roxtec (SWEDEN)
(For Fire Stopping Material)

OR EQUIVALENT

 ELECTRICAL & TELEPHONE DUCTS-BANK

1- QPLAST (Qatar)

2- PETRO PLASTIC (Qatar)

OR EQUIVALENT

260536 CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

 CABLE TRAY

1- DAVIS (U.K)

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 2 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

2- WIBE (Sweden)

3- EGA/MK (U.K)

4- NIEDAX (Germany)

5- SWIFT (France)

OR EQUIVALENT

 CABLE TRUNKING

1- DAVIS (U.K)

2- WIBE (Sweden)

3- EGA/MK (U.K)

4- NIEDAX (Germany)

5- SWIFT (France)

6- BURN TUBES (U.K)

OR EQUIVALENT

261200 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER AND ACCESSORIES

1- ABB (Germany)

2- Schneider Electric (France)

3- Tesar (Italy)

4- Federal Transformers (Italy)

OR EQUIVALENT

262300 LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

 BUS BAR TRUNKING

1- General Electric (U.S.A)

2- Siemens (Germany)

3- MEM POWER (U.K)

4- BARDUCT (U.K)

OR EQUIVALENT

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 3 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

 LOW VOLTAGE PANELS

1- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

2- ABB (EUROPE)

3- EATON (USA) .

OR EQUIVALENT

262413 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD

1- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

2- ABB (EUROPE)

3- EATON (USA) .

4- SIEMENS (GERMANY) .

5- GENERAL ELECTRIC (USA) .

OR EQUIVALENT

 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER

1- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

2- ABB (EUROPE)

3- SIEMENS (GERMANY) .

4- GENERAL ELECTRIC (USA) .

OR EQUIVALENT

262416 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND DEVICES

1- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

2- ABB (EUROPE)

3- EATON (USA) .

4- SIEMENS (GERMANY) .

5- GENERAL ELECTRIC (USA) .

OR EQUIVALENT

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 4 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

262419 DISCONECT SWITCH

1- Katko (Finland)

2- Scame (Italy)

3- Socomec (U.S.A)

4- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

5- ABB (EUROPE)

OR EQUIVALENT

262726 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

1- MK (U.K)
(Type Should be approved by Arch.)

2- Legrand (France)
(Type Should be approved by Arch.)

3- CARBTREE (U.K)
(Type Should be approved by Arch.)

4- Jung (Germany)
(Type Should be approved by Arch.)

5- MEM (U.K)

OR EQUIVALENT

263213 STANDBY DISESL GENERATOR SET

1- Cummins (U.S.A)

2- Caterpillar (U.S.A)

3- Volvo (Sweden)

4- MTU (Germany)

OR EQUIVALENT

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 5 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

263323 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

1- Meniver (U.K.)

2- Obrik (U.K.)

3- Ventilux (U.K.)

4- Etap (U.K.)

5- Cooper (U.S.A)

6- BARDIC (AUSTRALIA-NEW ZELAND)

7- ETS (U.K.)

8- CENTRAL TRIDONIC (Austria)

9- THOMAS & BETTS (ABB) (U.K.)

10-LEGRAND (FRANCE)

11-CEAG (GERMANY)

12- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

OR EQUIVALENT

263353 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

1- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

2- Chlorid (Italy)

3- Liebert-emerson (Ireland)

4- Meta System (Italy)

OR EQUIVALENT

263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL AND DEVICES

1- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

2- ABB (EUROPE)

3- SIEMENS (GERMANY) .

4- GENERAL ELECTRIC (USA) .

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 6 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

OR EQUIVALENT

263600 TRANSFER SWITCH

1- SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (FRANCE)

2- ABB (EUROPE)

3- GE Zenth Controls (USA)

4- ASCO (USA)

5- Russ Electric (USA)

OR EQUIVALENT

264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

1- Axis Electrical Component Ltd (U.K)

2- Furse (U.K)

3-Kingsmill (U.K.)

4-Rychem RPG (U.K.)

OR EQUIVALENT

265100 LIGHTING FITTINGS

 Refer to drawings & ID specs.

1-PHILPS (Holland)

2-DISANO (Italy)

3-BEGA (GERMANY)

4-ERCO (GERMENY)

OR EQUIVALENT

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 7 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

270526 EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELV SYSTEMS

1- Furse (U.K)

2- Erico (Germany)

3- Wallis (U.K)

4-Rychem RPG (U.K.)

OR EQUIVALENT

271100 TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

 NETWORK ACTIVE EQUIPMENT

1. Cisco (U.S.A)

2. Nortel (U.S.A)

OR EQUIVALENT

 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM

1- AMP (U.S.A)

2- Nordex (U.S.A)

3- Comscope (SYSTIMAX) (U.S.A)

4- Alcatel (France)

5- R&M (Switzerland)

OR EQUIVALENT

275116 PUBLIC ADDRESSES AND VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

1- TOA (Japan)

2- Dynacord (Germany)

3- Bosch (Netherlands)

4- Bose / Crown (U.S.A)

OR EQUIVALENT

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 8 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

275123 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

1. BOSCH (NETHERLAND)

2. SIEDLE (U.S.A)

3. SCHNIDER (GERMANY)

4. ELVOX (ITALY)

OR EQUIVALENT

281300 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

1. AXIS (SWEDEN)

2. BOSCH (NETHERLANDS)

4- VICON (U.S.A)

3. PELCO (U.S.A)

4. SIEMENS (GERMANY)

5. SONY (Japan)

OR EQUIVALENT

283111 FIRE ALARM AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM

1- Edwards Systems Technology (EST) (Canada)

2- Notifier (U.S.A)

3- Siemens (U.S.A)

4- Simplex (U.S.A)

5- Honeywell (U.S.A)

OR EQUIVALENT

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 9 of 10
 SECTION 26 01 00
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED SUPPLIERS OF EQUIPMENT

ADDITIONAL ITEMS

“MOI-SSD SPECS” CLOESD CIRCUIT TV (CCTV)

1- AXIS (SWEDEN)

2- BOSCH (NERTHERLANDS)

3- PELCO (USA)

4- SIEMENS (GERMANY)

5-SONY (JAPAN)

6-VICON (USA)

OR EQUIVALENT

END OF SECTION 260100

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 01 00 - Page 10 of 10
 SECTION 26 05 19
CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

SECTION 260519

CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. The Contractor shall supply, install and connect all wires and cables necessary for complete electrical system, as
indicated on the drawings, as required and as specified herein.

B. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARD

BS 1442......... Galvanized mild steel wire for armouring cables
BS 2484........... Straight concrete clay ware covers
BS 2897........... Aluminium strip armour for cables
BS 3506........... Unplasticised PVC pipe for industrial purposes
BS 4066........... (IEC 332) Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
BS 4660........... Unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (PVC-u) pipes and plastic fittings of nominal sizes 110 and 160
for below ground gravity drainage and sewerage
BS 5308........... Instrumentation cables.
BS 5467 (IEC 502) Cables with thermosetting Insulation for electricity supply for voltages of up to and
including 600/1000 V and 19000/30000 V
BS 6004........... (IEC 227) PVC insulated cables (non-armoured) for electrical power
BS 6007........... Rubber insulated cables for electric power and lighting
BS 6207........... (IEC 245) Mineral insulated cables.
BS 6234........... Polythene insulation and sheath for cables.
BS 6346........... PVC insulated cables for electrical supply.
BS 6360........... (IEC 228) Copper conductors for cables.
BS 6500........... (IEC 227) Insulated flexible cords.
BS 6622 (IEC 502) Cables with extruded cross linked polyethylene Insulation,
for rated voltage 3800/6000 V up to 19000/30000 V
BS 6746........... PVC Insulation and sheath of electric cables
BS 6746C ........ Colour chart for insulation and sheath of electric cables
BS 6899........... Rubber insulation and sheath of electric cables
BS 7671........... Requirements for electrical installations
BS EN 29453... Soft solder alloys-chemical composition and forms
ISO 9000 ......... Quality management and assurance standards

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 19 - Page 1 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 19
CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. The Contractor shall determine the correct size of cables to be used for the equipment selected, based on current
rating and voltage drop, as relevant, after taking into consideration:
(a) type of cable and wire
(b) ambient conditions
(c) method of installation
(d) the disposition of each cable relative to other cables
(e) fault power level
(f) protective device ratings
(g) motor circuit voltage drops during starting

C. Voltage drop and current ratings shall be calculated according to QGEWC Regulations or BS 7671 and IEE regulation,
whichever is more stringent.

D. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of types, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the materials furnished under these specifications against defective
parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealers’ standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE CORE AND MULTI-CORE ARMOURED CABLES

A. Cables shall be single or multi-core as described in the schedules or indicated on the drawings.

B. Cables shall be armoured and PVC sheathed. Multi-core cables shall be steel wire armoured and single core cables
shall be high conductivity copper to BS 6360 or Aluminuim to BS 6791 unless otherwise indicated

C. The core insulation of armoured cables shall be colored as follows:

Cable
Color
Red or Yellow or Blue + Black +Yellow with
Single phase (L+N+E)
green strip
Red + Yellow + Blue + Black +Yellow with
Three phase (L1+L2+L3+N+E)
green strip

D. Conductors shall be either plain or annealed tinned copper complying with BS 6360.Aluminum conductors where
specified shall comply with BS 6791.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 19 - Page 2 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 19
CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

E. The insulation of the cable shall be PVC, XLPE or LSF materials as described in the schedules or indicated on the
drawings.

F. However, in general Cables size 16mm2 and above shall be Cross Link Poly Ethylene (XLPE) insulated and cables size
less than 16 mm2 shall be PVC insulated, unless otherwise specifically mentioned.

G. Armor shall consist of a single layer Galvanized Steel wire complying with BS 1442.

2.2 WIRES & CABLES

A. Conductors shall be of high conductivity annealed copper with concentric stranding for stranded conductors, to BS
6360, or approved equal.

B. Minimum conductor size used to include earth wire shall not be less than 2.5 mm2.

C. All wires for lighting and power systems pulled inside conduits shall be single core, insulated with PVC compound, of
grade not less than 450/750 volts, to BS 6004.

D. Armoured cables shall be multicore unless otherwise indicated, PVC sheathed, galvanized steel wire and overall
PVC extruded sheathed, of grade not less than 600/1000 volts to BS 6346.

E. Single core armoured cable where used shall have a hard drawn aluminum wired armouring.

F. Conductors shall be solid-stranded.

G. Flexible cords for connection of fixtures to circuit-wiring shall have finely stranded copper Conductor with PVC
insulation, type NYFAF, 450/750 V grade.

2.3 HEAT RESISTANT WIRES AND CABLES

A. Cords used for water heater connections shall be of high conductivity tinned copper wires, (2.5 mm2 unless otherwise
indicated) insulated with ethylene propylene rubber, three cores twisted together, filled and sheathed with Chloro-
Sulphonated poly Ethylene (EPR CSP), 300/500 V rated, and shall withstand an operating temperature of 85C, to
BS 6500.

B. Cords used for pendant lighting points and between lighting outlet above false ceiling to lighting fixture shall be
circular two core (1.5 mm2) silicon rubber insulated, glass fiber braided 300/300 V rated, shall withstand an
operating temperature of 105 OC, to BS 6500.

C. Cords used for extract fans shall be of plain annealed copper conductor (1.5 mm2), PVC insulated, circular twin
cores twisted together, PVC overall sheated 300/500 V rated, shall withstand an operating temperature of 70 OC, to
BS 6500.

2.4 MICC CABLES

A. MICC Cables shall be carried out in grades of copper sheathed, copper conductor cables, insulated with compressed
mineral insulated supplied and tested in accordance with BS EN 60702: Part 1.

B. Cables can be supplied with an overall LSF plastic covering to provide protection of the copper sheath in potentially
corrosive environments and circuit identification by color.

C. All terminations shall be supplied by the cable manufacturer and shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 60702:
Part 2. They shall be fitted in accordance with the manufacturer's latest recommended terminating procedures.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 19 - Page 3 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 19
CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

D. When cables require to be jointed, or where cables are damaged, straight through joints can be used. Joints shall only be
used with the prior approval of the consultant and shall be of a type supplied by cable manufacture.

2.5 FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

A. Cables of the Fire alarm system shall be of high grade fire cell and fire resistant cables complying with the local
authorities, regulations, BS Standards. BS 6387:1994 category (BZW) & BS 6425: Part 1: 1990, and all cable sheathes
shall be LSF grade (Low smoke and fumes) complying with BS 6425: Part 1: 1990 & certified by BASEC & LPCB.

B. All detectors/loops shall be wired in 1.5 mm2 fire proof cables and cables for sounders circuits shall be with 2.5 mm2
fire proof cables as specified above in item (1) and wired directly from the Control Panels or through local interface
units, with monitoring battery backup power supply.

C. At all the termination points, cable shall be provided with an approved cable connection to outlet boxes, panels, devices
or fire alarm equipment, fittings, etc., the same shall be of fire rated threaded gland type with locknut and shall be made
according to manufacturer’s instructions.

D. GI conduits shall be used wherever the cable is used exposed to vision or above false ceiling void and non-metalic rigid
PVC conduits may be used where embedded in walls or slabs to the approval of local fire authorities and acceptance of
Engineer.

2.6 COAXIAL CABLES

A. Coaxial Cables shall comprise of inner conductor of solid accurately dimensioned electrolytic copper, insulation of
high grade solid polyethylene, outer conductor of a longitudinally overlapping copper foil tightly enclosed in a
copper-wire braiding, outer sheath of a pliable PVC.

B. Characteristic impedance shall be 75 ohms.

C. Inner conductor shall have a minimum of 0.7 mm diameter.

D. Overall diameter of cable shall not be less than 7 mm.

E. Cable shall have a tensile strength on outer conductor of 20 kgf for one minute.

2.7 CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 6 mm2 and smaller such as for lighting branch circuits, self-insulated
pressure type connectors shall be utilized for all splices or joints.

B. For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 10 mm2 and larger shall be of the bolted pressure type, DIN rail
Viking model and with a pre-insulated sleeve.

C. Connectors shall be manufactured from high conductivity copper, electro-tin plated.

D. Connector bodies shall be manufactured from Polyamide.

2.8 CABLE GLANDS

A. Cable glands shall be provided at the termination of armoured cables at the enclosure of a distribution board or any
other equipment.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 19 - Page 4 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 19
CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

B. Whether installed indoors or outdoors, all cable glands shall provide protection to IP 55 as a minimum.

Glands for armored cables shall be made of brass and incorporate an armour clamp and compression type neoprene
rubber seal over the inner sheath. For cable glands which may be exposed to rain or spraying water (e.g. due to hosing
down) an additional neoprene compression seal over the outer sheath shall be also provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRES & CABLES

A. All wires shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the listed codes and as indicated on the
Drawings.

B. The number of wires and sizes of conduits indicated on the Drawings is a guide only and are not necessarily the correct
number and sizes necessary for the actual equipment installed. The Contractor shall install as many wires and conduits
as required and necessary for a complete electrical system, and shall provide adequately for the equipment actually to
be installed.

C. Where more than one conductor is used per phase, each phase, neutral if any and ground wires shall be run in each
metallic or non-metallic conduit.

D. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except within outlet or junction
boxes.

E. At every outlet and pull box, wires and cables passing through shall be left slack by an amount equivalent to 15 cm of
cable length to allow inspection and connection to be made therein.

F. No cable bend shall have a radius of less than eight times its diameter.

G. The Contractor shall not change any circuit number, especially from a phase to a different phase. If such a change is
necessary due to modification on site, the Contractor shall bring this matter to the attention of the engineer.

H. All conductors to be contained within a single conduit shall be drawn in at the same time.

I. A wire pulling compound shall be applied to conductors being drawn through conduit. Pulling compound shall be soap
tone or other approved material.

J. Only cables forming part of a lift installation if any may be run in a lift shaft.

K. Wires and cables for feeders, sub-feeders, control, and branch circuit wiring shall be color coded as Red for Phase 1,
Yellow for Phase 2, Blue for Phase 3, Black for Neutral and Green for Equipment grounding

L. Wire and cable sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings; however in no case shall their size be smaller than required
by the listed Code.

M. Unless otherwise indicated, no conductor for lighting and power wires shall be smaller than 2.5 mm2.

N. All branch circuits for lighting and appliances shall be single conductor cables run inside conduits, unless otherwise
indicated.

O. Feeders and sub-feeders shall be either single conductor wires pulled inside conduits or multi-conductor cables run
exposed on walls or in trenches as shown on the Drawings.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 19 - Page 5 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 19
CABLES AND SMALL WIRING

P. Single cables shall be fixed directly to walls or ceilings. Where 2 or more cables are run in parallel, they shall be
fixed on galvanized steel perforated trays or on other approved special cable supporting and protecting arrangement.

Q. Surface wiring (Fire alarm cables, etc.) cables shall be fixed to surfaces by means of clips, saddles or fixing strip
supplied by cable manufacturer.

R. Cables shall be fixed to supporting structures with approved galvanized cast steel clamps at distances not exceeding 20
diameters.

S. Armoured cables used in vertical shafts shall be the steel wire armoured and not the tape type.

T. No joints or splices shall be accepted on main feeders, unless with an approved means, which shall be to the approval
of local power supply authority.

U. Cable shall be supported at not more than 75 times the cable outer diameter intervals by means of approved staples,
strap, hangers or other fittings to build structure or to specially designed brackets.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION OF WIRES & CABLES

A. Individual conductor or circuit identification shall be carried throughout, with circuit numbers or other
identification clearly stamped on terminal boards and printed on directory cards in distribution cabinets and panel
boards.

B. In junction boxes, cabinets, and terminal boxes where the total number of control, indicating, and metering wires
is three or fewer and no terminal board is provided, each wire including all power wires, shall be properly
identified by means of a plastic-coated, self-adhesive, wire marker.

C. Wires including motor leads and other power wires too large for connection to the terminal boards shall be identified by
wire markers as specified above.

D. In manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, junction boxes and at both terminals each wire and cable shall be properly
identified by a laminated plastic tag located so as to be easily seen. Wires and cables shall be identified by cable
number indicated on the Drawings by using identification ferrules for wires and laminated plastic/metallic tags on
cables.

3.3 CABLE TERMINATIONS

A. All cables terminations or joints other than sub-circuit wiring shall be carried out by using compression type connectors
or lugs of size and type suitable for required application.

B. Correct type hydraulic crimping tools shall be used for each particular application. Manufacture’s recommendations
shall be strictly followed particularly in maintaining the recommended crimping tool pressure.

3.4 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 260519

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 19 - Page 6 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

SECTION 260526

EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the standards
and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. This section specifies the engineering, supply, installation, testing, commissioning and setting to work of the complete grounding
and lightning protection for individual systems and equipment accordance with local electrical supply authority, BS and IEE
regulation.

B. A complete grounding and lightning protection network comprising of cables, copper tapes, electrodes, and earth bonding of all
relevant necessary non-current carrying metal shall be supplied, erected, and connected as required.

C. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for system
operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. BS7671 : Electrical Installation.

B. BS7430 : Earthing.

C. BS6651 : Lightning Protection System.

D. IEC 61024-1-2 : Lightning Protection System

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing Authorities.

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

C. The earthing system shall be in accordance with QGEWC rules and regulation.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 26 - Page 1 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against defective parts and
workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than two years from
date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Common earth mats of resistivity of less than one (1) ohm shall be constructed below the lowest floor structure prior to any ground
work construction.

B. The copper earth mats shall comprise the complete earth electrodes, earth strips/grids, earth inspection chambers, earth leads, main
earth terminals, earth test link boxes at ground level, etc. as specified in the drawing.

C. Under these, Specification circumstances, each individual grounding and bonding system shall have earth leads connecting its main
earth terminal directly to an earth electrode underground as specified.

D. In the case where drilling is required to take the earth rods tapes below ground level, a specified earth resistance enhancement
compound shall be added into the bored holes and a mixture at 60% bentonite and 40% of gypsum to 125% of water mixed to give a
thick slurry.

E. It shall be grouted into the holes prior to inserting of rods or tapes, and be allowed to solidify. The hiring of machine drilling
equipment and the grouting as described above shall be provided by the Contractor.

F. The grounding and bonding system shall be formed from copper tapes or copper alloy as specified in the drawing and specification.

G. All copper tape clips, holdfasts, clamps, earth rod clamps, etc. shall be supplied by the same manufacturer of the stainless steel or
copper tapes and rods.

H. The mating surface of all tapes at joints etc shall be cleaned before clamping and all joints shall be riveted, joint with proper
connector or exothermic welded. All connectors to electrical apparatus shall be made by a bolted connection in a visible and
accessible position

I. Copper tapes shall be secured with appropriate size saddles at intervals not exceeding 600 mm and the tapes shall be supplied in long
unbroken lengths to avoid unnecessary jointing.

J. Materials forming electrolytic couple shall not be combined.

2.2 EARTH ELECTRODE

A. Earth electrode rods shall be 16 mm diameter extensible steel core copper jacketed type of 3.6m long in 1.2m sections with internal
bronze coupler and socket joints, driving head and connection clamp.

B. Steel core copper jacked rods shall have tensile strength of approximately 600 N/m Couplings for each section of the rod shall be of
same material of the rod, threaded to fit the rod sections.

C. Driving studs shall be used when driving the electrode into the ground.

D. Earth values shall be measured and recorded before coupling and driving in the next section.

E. Earth electrodes must penetrate to a minimum level of 2 meters below the summer water table of the site.

F. Clamping of the earth leads to the earth rod shall be made by earth clamp.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 26 - Page 2 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

G. The clamps shall be capable of providing a high pressure contact between the earth rod and the earth leads to achieve a low contact
resistance.

H. When two or more electrodes are driven to form a group, the heads of the electrodes in the group shall be bonded to each other by
means of a 25 mm x 3mm copper tape, laid at a depth of at least 600 mm in soil.

I. All earth electrode penetrations through basement water proofing membranes shall be provided with manufacturer’s recommended
water seal insert sleeve approved by Engineer.

J. The installation of the water seal insert sleeve shall be under the supervision and endorsed by the manufacturer’s representative to
ensure the installation comply with the manufacturer installation detail.

2.3 EARTH INSPECTION CHAMBER

A. Earth electrode shall be fitted with a heavy-duty precast concrete inspection chamber/pit complete with heavy-duty cover as
specified on drawings.

B. Each earth electrode shall be clearly marked ‘SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH CONNECTION – DO NOT REMOVE in both
English and Arabic.

C. The chamber and cover shall be heavy duty detail to consider the traffic load at the location of installation.

D. The earth pit cover shall have recessed lifting hook.

E. The earth pit cover shall have a brass plate, engraved “Electrical Earth Below”.

F. All bolted connections shall be protected against corrosion.

G. For earth electrodes located outside or on the apron of the building, earth inspection chambers shall extend to a depth of not less than
300 mm below finished ground level and kept free of soil.

H. For earth electrodes located inside building, earth electrodes shall be buried not less than 100 mm below the floor slab structure.

2.4 EARTH LEAD

A. Earth leads, also commonly known as earth conductors, shall be used for the final connection between the earth electrodes and the
main earth terminals.

B. Bury at least 600mm below grade.

C. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 300mm above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

D. Unless otherwise specified, earth leads shall be of 25mm x 3mm copper tape.

2.5 EARTH STRIP

A. Earth strips/grids shall be of bare copper tapes of 25 mm x 3 mm as specified.

B. Earth strips shall be riveted or joint with proper connector to earth electrodes underground below the floor slab structure, and shall
be buried not less than 300 mm below the floor slab structure.

C. In order to minimize the mutual inductance between strips, earth strips shall be positioned at a distance not less than 6m apart unless
otherwise specified.

2.6 MAIN EARTH TERMINAL

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 26 - Page 3 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

A. Main earth terminals shall be provided for the termination of each grounding and bonding system. 50mm x 6 mm tinned HDHC
copper earth bars of not less than 1000 mm in length shall be installed in the respective plant rooms / switch rooms at a height of 300
mm above finished floor level.

B. The insulators shall be the approved type. Interconnection between plant rooms / switch rooms and connection to earth electrodes
shall be minimum 2 direct Connection and as per the Drawings and/or as required to complete the installations.

C. Suitable grounding and bonding terminals shall be provided in all the equipment housings, switchgear enclosures, relayed and
instrument casings and all other electrical metalwork for bonding to earth.

D. The earth connections for all sections of the installation shall be electrically continuous throughout back to the corresponding main
earth terminals to receive the earth continuity conductors and bonding earth cables as Drawings and/or as required completing the
installation.

2.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Joints in the earth bars, copper tapes and earth mats shall be butt weld or brazed such that the resistance of the section containing the
joint shall not exceed that of an equivalent length at unwonted conductor.

B. Any joint so made may be required to be tested to prove compliance with the requirement.

C. The contact faces of all protect conductors shall be cleaned and tinned before connections are made.

D. No drilling of the earth bar shall be permitted except in terminations.

2.8 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

A. The lightning protection system shall include bonding conductors intercepting conductors, down conductors, earth loop, ground rods
and all required components and wiring for a complete system.

B. Roof conductors shall be 25mm x 3mm copper tape.

C. Bonding conductors and earthing conductors shall be PVC covered copper tape 25mm x 3mm (color to match building finish). Re-
bar within columns shall be utilized for down conductors.

D. The piles shall be utilized as the earthing system. The Contractor shall measure the resistance of piles during construction.

E. The system design shall be prepared and certified by the manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EARTH ELECTRODE AND PIT

A. Sufficient numbers of electrodes interconnect by copper to form grounding and bonding mat so that the overall earth resistance shall
be less than 1 ohm for each individual grounding and bonding mat.

B. The Contractor shall test the resistivity of soil at site and provide the exact number of earth electrodes to achieve the earth resistance
value subject to Engineer approval.

C. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer before installing earth rod and carryout the work in the presence of the Engineer or the
representative.

D. Earth electrodes shall be installed to a minimum level of 2 meters below the summer water table of the site.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 26 - Page 4 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

E. Installation shall be supervised and tested by a representative of the manufacturer of the system equipment. The work shall be
performed by skilled technicians under the direction of experienced engineers, all of whom shall be properly factory trained and
qualified for this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION EARTHING NETWORK

A. Circuit wiring shall have a green/yellow coloured insulated earth continuity cable connecting the earth bus or earth terminal
in switchboards, switchgears, motor control centres and panel boards to the motor, equipment, outlet and other device by earthing
lugs. All hand rails and other metal works within 2 m of a potentially live metal surface shall be earthed.

B. The whole of the earthing and bonding shall be installed and tested in accordance with the requirements of the IEE Wiring
Regulations, Local Authority requirement and this specification.

C. Provide interconnected earth ring for the sub-station. Consumer electrical equipment earth bonding shall be 120mm2.

D. Attention is drawn to the use of circuit protective conductors in addition to metallic conduit/trunking.

E. All enclosures, equipment, exposed conductive parts, extraneous conductive parts, metallic trunking, metallic conduits, metallic
cable trays and other metalwork, other than any live part, forming protection to or part of the electrical installation, including
apparatus and appliances, shall be effectively bonded to earth.

F. Protective conductors shall be provided in the form of copper tape to all vertical electrical rising busbars. The size of this tape shall
be in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations.

G. All bonding and protective conductors, where fixed to bolted connections, shall be terminated in compression type lugs made with
an automatic purpose-made machine.

H. Provide an earth bar 450mm long on 10mm spacers on the wall of each electrical room, and connect to the enclosure and ground
buses of all equipment in the room.

I. Run a No.120mm2 sheathed copper cable from the main 600V switchboard ground bus to the main water pipe and connect to the
upstream side of the water meter.

J. Bond water main with proprietary purpose made bonding clamps. Scrape and sand the water main to remove all rust, paint or scale
at the location where the connection is to be made.

K. Remove non-conductive coatings from threads or other contact surfaces to ensure good electrical continuity.

L. Provide a separate insulated ground conductor in every conduit, in every system, to all devices and fixtures.

M. Protect all exposed grounding conductors from mechanical damage.

N. Soldered joints are not permitted.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION

A. The system shall be installed by a contractor licensed to carry out such installations and be in compliance with BS 6651 latest
edition.

B. Thermite welds all connections between cables, aerial terminals and ground rods. Compression type connectors may be used where
approved.

C. Measure resistance of the complete installation and submit for review to the Engineer.

D. Test clamps shall be provided in each inspection pit to allow for testing and commissioning.

E. Bond each down conductor to the building reinforcement bar at the top of the building. (All bonding to reinforcement bar shall be
Thermite weld).

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 26 - Page 5 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

F. Upon completion of the Work, submit a certificate of installation from licensed contractor to the Engineer for reviews and approval.

G. Include a copy of the installation certificate in the building operation manuals.

H. Concrete inspection pits shall be installed flush with finished floor level and be fully accessible.

I. Fixing of copper tape to roof structure shall utilize cold bitumen (drilling of roof structure will not be permitted) refer to Section
07500 for detail of compound.

3.4 MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING INSTALLATION

A. This is referred to the conductor for the equi-potential earth bonding of the metalwork of other services such as gas and water to the
grounding and bonding system. This bonding of service pipes shall be made as close as possible to their point of entry to a building.

B. All extraneous conductive parts of the services shall be connected to the main earth terminal by means of main equi-potential
bonding conductors

C. The metalwork of public gas and water service shall not be used as a sole protective earth electrode.

D. Main equi-potential bonding conductors shall have cross-sectional areas not less than half of the cross sectional area of the earth
conductor of the installation, subject to a minimum of 6mm2 for copper cables.

3.5 CERTIFICATES AND TESTING

A. Testing earthing systems shall be done by the earth megger test.

B. The complete installation shall be tested and inspected to ensure that it complies with the requirements of this Specification, the IEE
Wiring Regulations, British Standards and Local Electricity authority.

C. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations and to the satisfaction of the Local Electricity authority.

3.6 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 260526

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 26 - Page 6 of 6
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

SECTION 260533

CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. The system shall include conduits, fittings (couplings, bends, boxes, cover plates, reducers, adaptors, etc.) and all
necessary parts to install a complete conduit system.

B. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. The following references are referred to in this part :

BS 731 Flexible steel conduits and adapters for the protection of electric cable.
BS 2782 Method of testing plastics
BS 4568 Steel conduits and fittings, metric units
BS 4607 Non-metallic conduits and fittings for electrical installations rigid PVC
conduits and conduit fittings, metric units

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Conduits and fittings shall be distinctively marked as manufactured for electrical purposes.

C. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 1 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealers’ standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UPVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. Sleeves shall be provided for exposed conduit or cables passing through interior floor slabs and walls. Sleeves passing
through floor slabs shall be flush with the bottom of the slab, extended approximately 3 cm. above the surface of the
floor and be water-tight between sleeves and floor slab.

B. Sleeves passing through exterior walls and slabs shall be wall entrance seals or water-tight construction. They shall be
water-tight between slab and sleeve, and between sleeve and conduit and cable. These wall entrance seals shall be of
malleable iron with black paint finish and PVC sleeve, with water-tight sealing gland.

C. Sealing gland design shall be such that they may be tightened any time after installation. Wall entrance seals have
oversized sleeves of proper length to position the sealing-gland housing with the wall faces.

D. After the cable has been pulled through the duct, a seal shall be made around it, within the duct with a bituminous
mastic compound, making the seal water-tight.

2.2 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. All conduit used throughout the Electrical Installation shall be manufactured in accordance with the BS 4568, except
where the installation is required to be flameproof. In this instance the conduit shall be of heavy gauge screwed steel
solid drawn from the billet.

B. All conduits shall be rigid high impact heavy gauge galvanized class 4 by the hot dip process both inside and out by
zinc coating of uniform quality and appearance through all surfaces. Care should be taken to make watertight all
screwed joints by means of a suitable metallic paint.

C. Conduits shall not be less than 20 mm inner diameter size, and shall be complete with all necessary threaded fittings,
couplings and connecting devices having galvanized equivalent finish.

D. All fittings shall be of the screwed circle box type and no solid or inspection elbows, tees or bends shall be installed
without instructions in writing from the Engineer. Generally, conduit fittings shall be galvanized inside and out to
match the conduit system specified; such fittings shall be of Class B pattern.

E. All conduits shall be coupled to boxes and trunking wires using brass male bushes. All such bushes shall be hexagon
headed, heavy duty long threaded type

F. All conduit expansion couplings used shall be fabricated from material equal or equivalent to that of the conduit
with which the coupling is to be used, having factory installed packing ring and pressure ring to prevent entrance
of moisture. All coupling shall be equipped with earthing ring or earthing conductor

G. All conduit runs shall be fixed using spacer bar pattern saddles giving not less than 3 mm clearance between the
conduit and the surface to which it is fixed. Saddles shall have finish to match the conduit and saddle clips shall be
secured to the bar by means of brass screws.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 2 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

2.3 RIGID PVC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS

A. All conduits shall be PVC-U grade material comply with BS 4607 Part 1 Type A or Type B or with BS 6099 / IEC614.
Light and medium gauge conduit shall not be incorporated in the works; only heavy gauge conduit shall be used.
Conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilizing the appropriate components as supplied by the same conduit
manufacturers.

B. Permanent adhesive, solvent cement shall be used to produce a rigid watertight joint when used with standard couplers
and accessories.

C. Flexible adhesive a non-hardening adhesive shall be used where expansion facilities are required in long conduit runs in
conjunction with expansion couplers.

D. Conduit & fittings shall be resistant to high temperatures, non-hygroscopic, self-extinguishing, of adequate insulation
resistance and electric strength.

E. Conduits shall not be less than 20 mm inner diameter size unless otherwise indicated, where size is not indicated :
select in accordance with the regulations.

F. The minimum conduit wall thickness shall be as following :

Conduit Size ( mm ) Conduit Wall Thickness ( mm )

20 1.8

25 1.9

32 2.3

38 2.5

50 3.1

G. Wherever possible, conduit junction boxes shall be of the BS circular pattern with appropriate spout entries and brass
inserts. All circular boxes shall be suitable for suspending a load of 10 kg centrally at 850 C maximum. Tangential entry
circular boxes shall be used where appropriate.

H. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large PVC adaptable boxes for junctions.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND CONNECTIONS

A. Where a flexible conduit connection is required between the conduit system and electric motors, other apparatus or
structural expansion joint, the flexible conduit shall be watertight, and shall comply with BS 731 Part 1.

B. All adapters shall be of the non-ferrous split-type and securely attached by means of four screws. Suitable bonding
terminals are to be provided at each flexible termination for a separate earth conductor.

C. Not less than 500 mm of flexible conduit shall be installed unless otherwise specified and a separate earth conductor
shall be run inside the flexible conduit connected to earth terminals in the connection box on the motor, starter, etc. and
to the fixed conduit run. The flexible conduit will not be considered as an earth connection.

D. Flexible connections where connections to electrical machines are to be by multicore glands, the final termination shall
be by ring type universal glands and locknuts, and adequate slack cable in the form of a loop or spiral being left to
allow for the movement of motors necessitated by belt tensioning, vibration, etc.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 3 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

E.

2.5 PVC AND GI JUNCTION BOXES

A. Boxes shall be standard PVC as specified under conduits and fittings, except for recess lighting outlets which shall be
high degree type.

B. High degree type boxes shall be manufactured from Noryl, a thermoplastic with a higher softening temperature. Boxes
shall withstand a 10 Kg. Load directly suspended at 100 deg. C for 24 hours. Boxes shall incorporate pillars with
threaded steel inserts.

C. Boxes used for hanging fixtures shall be suitable for ceiling roses. Boxes for installation in concrete tight. Shallow
boxes shall not be used unless building construction is such that it is impossible to use standard depth boxes.

D. Boxes covers shall be constructed of ferroalloy cad/zinc electro-plated with aluminum cellulose lacquered. Blank
covers shall be constructed of sheet steel with gasket and stainless steel screws except for damp and wet locations.

E. In damp and wet locations blank covers shall be constructed from cast ferroalloy with gasket and stainless steel screws.

F. Floor boxes shall be water tight one piece cast iron coated inside and out for additional corrosion resistance. Threaded
steel cover shall be electro-galvanized. Boxes shall have adjusting screws.

G. All boxes shall be provided with grounding (earth) terminals.

H. Junction boxes for signaling, communications, alarms and control wiring shall be provided with terminal strips.
Terminal strips shall have screw type terminals and cable identification strip.

I. Boxes of ample capacity shall be provided at every junction conduit system and as required by the Specifications.

J. All boxes shall be securely fastened.

2.6 DRAW-IN-BOXES AND LIDS

A. Draw-in boxes or through boxes shall be provided to give access to all conduits for the drawing in or out of any cable
after the installation is completed. The draw-in boxes shall be of ample size to enable the cables to be neatly diverted
from one conduit to another without undue cramping. No joints will be allowed in draw-in boxes under any
circumstances.

B. All draw-in boxes shall be complete with suitable rust proofed iron covers, securely fixed in position with round head
brass screws and where flush boxes are installed the covers shall be of the overlapping rust proofed pattern.

C. Generally, where conduit is to be installed from one point to another point in a straight run with no bends, draw-in
boxes shall be provided at every 10 meters of conduit run but where conduits are run from point to point with not more
than two right angle bends e.g. from ceiling point to ceiling point, boxes shall be installed not more than 7.5 m apart.

D. Ceiling draw-in boxes (where permitted), except in the case of surface conduit shall finish flush with the underside of
the ceilings, extension rings being used where necessary. Other draw-in boxes shall be installed in the walls and no in
floors.

E. Circular boxes shall not be used in flush systems solely for the purpose of "drawing-in", rectangular boxes shall be
used.

F. Where multiple conduit runs occur, rectangular adaptable boxes shall be used by arrangement with the Engineer to
avoid the use of an excessive number of individual draw-in boxes with suitable barriers being installed where
necessary.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 4 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

G. Heavy gauge mild steel lids at least 1.5 mm thick shall be provided for all metallic boxes where lids are appropriate.
Where boxes are recessed in the walls or ceilings and flush with the surface, the lids must be large enough to overlap
the boxes on which they are fixed by not less than 6 mm on all sides. Brass M4 round head or raised head screws shall
be used throughout for fixing lids to boxes.

2.7 DRAW PITS, MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVERS

A. The size of covers shall be as shown on the drawing or 600 x 600 mm unless otherwise specified. Covers shall be
bituminous coated, cast iron, lifting keys in accordance with specification BS 497.

B. Contractor shall apply a layer of grease to the seal. External draw pits shall be constructed in RCC as shown on the
drawings. Galvanized malleable steel step irons for use in draw pits shall comply with BS 1247 – 1975.

C. All draw pit covers shall be engraved with the name for the purpose used unless otherwise specified all covers are
single seal, no-locking, non-rocking medium duty for internal, heavy duty for external application.

D. For Telephone Services, the Contractor shall procure Local Service Provider covers and frames from the store by
paying the fee. The cost shall be included in the contract.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS

A. Conduits shall not be installed in contact with plumbing and mechanical services, a minimum distance of 150 mm
being maintained.

B. Prior to erection all burrs and sharp edges shall be removed from the conduit together with any dirt, oil or paint which
may be present.

C. Corners shall be turned by means of handmade bends or where this is impracticable by means of conduit boxes. Factory
made bends, tees and elbows and inspection tees and elbows shall not be used without approval.

D. Not more than two right-angled bends will be permitted between draw-in boxes.

E. All conduits, boxes and accessories comprising a circuit shall be erected before any wires in that circuit are drawn in.
Ends of conduits left open during building operations shall be effectively plugged and the thread of metal conduit
coated with petroleum jelly. Any blockages occurring in conduits shall be cleared. Conduits shall be swabbed through
before commencing wiring.

F. Saddles and distances pieces shall have the same finish as the conduit for which they are to be used, by single way or
multi-way as required and be fixed by means of screws in metal or other approved plugs. Wood or fiber plugs shall not
be used. Saddles shall be fixed on either side of all bends, draw-in boxes or sets.

G. Conduit laid in concrete poured 'in situ' shall be fastened to the reinforcement before concreting. All conduit boxes
shall be securely fixed to shuttering to prevent displacement and all open ends securely capped to prevent ingress of
slurry or water.

H. Before any conduits are concreted, earth continuity tests shall be carried out. Attendance during pouring shall be
provided to ensure that conduits and accessories are not displaced.

I. Conduits shall be not being installed in floor screeds without the approval of the Engineer. Before any screed is laid the
conduit shall be checked for rigidity and mechanical damage.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 5 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

J. Conduits embedded in ceiling slab, in walls and under-floor shall be non-metallic type.

K. Conduits exposed above false ceiling shall be galvanised steel .

L. Exposed conduits other than above false ceiling shall be galvanized steel .

M. All conduit work and plastering shall be completed before wires are pulled in unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer. Conduit shall be plugged with cork and boxes covered appropriately before plastering to avoid filling with
plaster.

N. Conduit runs between outlets shall not contain more than three quarter bends, or the equivalent. The maximum run
between two outlets shall not exceed 25 meters, for straight runs and 10 meters for runs with one or more bends. Pull
boxes shall be provided otherwise, whether so indicated on the Drawings or not. Position of pull boxes shall be to the
approval of the Engineer.

O. Conduits shall be installed without causing any damage to the structural members.

P. All bends shall be carefully made to prevent distortion of the circular cross section. Bends made on site in conduits
shall have an inside radium of not less than nine diameters.

Q. Where bends of less than nine diameters are necessary standard factory elbows shall be used, however the conduit size
chosen shall be such as to permit a cable bending radius within the factory elbow of at least eight times the cable
diameter.

R. Conduits in slab shall be installed as close to the middle of the concrete slabs as practicable without disturbing the
reinforcement. The outside diameter shall not exceed one third of the slab thickness and conduits shall be placed not
closer than three diameters from the centre to centre.

S. Conduits in slabs shall be placed parallel to the main reinforcement steel in the slab.

T. Top of any conduit shall be at least 2 cm below the finished floor surface, unless otherwise indicated or authorized.

U. Conduits running parallel to beam axis shall not run above beams.

V. Exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or at right angles to Walls and ceiling beams. All changes in direction shall
be made as far as possible with approved bends, elbows and pull boxes. The spacing between parallel runs shall be
uniform throughout. Unless otherwise indicated, conduits shall be held securely in place by standard factory spacer bar
saddles, spaced not more than 1 meter apart for non-metallic and 1.5 meters for metallic conduits. Expansion couplings
shall be installed at 8 meters in runs of exposed conduit work.

W. Unless otherwise indicated, raceways exposed above false ceilings shall be supported from the slab above the ceiling in
the manner as exposed raceways. Raceways shall not be supported from false ceiling supports. Couplings, expansions
coupling, strap saddles, spacer bar saddles, spring clip saddles, conduit clips, adaptors, etc., shall all be standard factory
conduit accessories.

X. Flexible metallic conduits shall be used only for connections to motors, or other equipment subject to vibration or
adjustment or to make connections to lighting fixtures in false ceilings. Each connection shall contain at least one
quarter bend so that no vibration can be transmitted behind the flexible connection.

Y. In damp and wet locations all couplings, expansion coupling, strap saddles; spacer bar saddles, spring clip saddles,
conduits clips, screws, adaptors shall be corrosion proof, approved for use in damp and wet locations.

Z. In damp and wet locations flexible conduits shall be liquid-tight.

AA. All conduits shall be carefully cleaned before and after installations. All ends shall be reamed free from burrs and
inside surfaces shall be free from all imperfection likely to injure the cable.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 6 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

BB. After installation of each complete new conduit run, the run shall be snaked with a band to which shall be attached an
approved tube cleaner equipped with an approved cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of the
nominal diameter of the conduit. All conduits through which the mandrel will not pass shall be removed and replaced
by the Contractor at his own expense.

CC. All fields cuts in conduits shall be square, and cut ends shall be filled and shall have burrs, removed. An insulating
bushing shall be installed on each end of conduit, unless the connector is designed to prevent contact with the cut end.
All connections shall be mechanically strong and tight, and made up properly with approved connectors. No running
threads shall be permitted.

DD. Expansion coupling shall be provided at every 6 meter run of exposed conduit work, at expansion joints or as required
to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction of both exposed and embedded conduits.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS

A. Duct routes shall be kept as straight as possible

B. Where bends are required in the duct, a pull-pit or chamber shall be installed.

C. Ducts shall be extra high impact UPVC or High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) duct complying with AS/NZS 2053.

D. In general, all duct installation shall be in open cut trench. Where crossings of existing roads or the like is required,
concrete bank shall be used as the preferred means to install ducts.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BOXES

A. Blank plates shall be installed on outlets boxes in which no apparatus is installed does not provide a suitable cover for
the box.

B. Device boxes shall be used for all wiring devices.

C. Non-metallic boxes shall be used only for concealed conduit work, and for conduit work above false ceiling.

D. Exposed boxes for switches, socket outlets and other devices shall be cast metal boxes.

E. Cast metal boxes shall be installed in such manner that the conduit connections and the gasketted cover are dust-tight.
All unused openings shall be closed with pipe plugs and compound.

F. Boxes for similar equipment shall be mounted at uniform height within the same or similar area. Mounting shall be as
shown on the Drawings.

G. Device boxes shapes and sizes shall be determined by the type and size of wiring devices for which they serve. Device
outlet boxes shall be made of galvanized steel and shall be from the same manufacturer as the wiring devices.

H. Lighting outlet boxes shall be circular outlets shall be plain with horizontal conduit connections where used exposed, or
above false ceiling, and shall be loop-in type where used embedded. Where so indicated lighting outlets shall be
provided with ceiling roses of approved type and a flexible cord with a bayonet type lamp holder.

I. Loop in type junction boxes shall be made of a high temperature resistant material.

J. Boxes fixed inside false ceiling shall be provided with mounting brackets for rigid fixing to structure members or other
means of support.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 7 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUITS AND CONDUIT BOXES

3.4 INSTALLATION OF JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Locate junction and pull boxes to be accessible at all times. Boxes may be installed in mechanical, electrical, storage or
janitor rooms or in hung ceiling space.

B. Provide access hatches for boxes installed in ceiling spaces unless ceiling tiles are of lay-in or snap-in type.

C. Locate junction and pull boxes so piping, ductwork or equipment will not restrict or block access. If such obstructions
are installed after junction or pull box is installed, the obstructions shall be removed or junction or pull box relocated
with no adjustment to the contract price.

D. Cables connected to terminals shall be identified by cable markers and at the terminal strip.

E. Terminal strips may be omitted where there are less than 5 connections in a junction box. All conductors shall be
identified by wire markers.

F. Terminals and cable identification may be omitted for through cables which are not broken at a junction box.

3.5 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 260533

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 33 - Page 8 of 8
 SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 260536

CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Specification for cable trays is as per BS EN 10130, BS EN 10131 and BS EN 10151 as appropriate

B. The cable tray and accessories shall be hot dip galvanization is as per BS 729.

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. All accessories used in the cable trays system such as bends, intersections risers, reducers shall be the product of the
same manufacturer as that of the cable tray. Site fabricated accessories are not acceptable.

B. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

C. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer’s standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 36 - Page 1 of 5
 SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABLE TRAY AND LADDER

A. Cable trays and ladders shall have a perforated construction, heavy duty with plain return flanges

B. The thickness of heavy duty cable tray and its accessories shall comply with minimum thickness of 1.5mm up to and
including 457mm, 2.0mm for above 457mm and including 914mm

C. The sub-contractor shall be responsible for selection of the correct size of cable tray to meet the site conditions and the
requirements of these specifications.

D. The joining bolts, nuts and washer shall be of galvanized steel. Brass shall not be used.

2.2 METAL TRUNKING

A. Metal cable trunking shall be manufactured from sheet steel in accordance with BS 4678.

B. Gauges shall be 1.6mm thickness up to 100mm x 100mm or equivalent cross sectional area, and 2mm thickness for
sizes over 100mm x 100mm.

C. Tray, fittings, supports and hangers shall be mild steel hot dipped galvanized.

D. Bolts, screws, pins, etc., shall be mild steel cadmium plated.

E. For all trays, flanges shall be a minimum of 50 mm deep, unless otherwise specified.

2.3 PVC TRUNKING

A. Plastic cable trunking shall be manufactured from heavy gauge high impact quality, self-extinguishing, extruded PVC
compound. Trunking shall be smooth inside and outside and fitted with drip-proof covers manufactured in accordance
with BS 4678 Part 4.

B. All conduit and trunking in unconditioned, unfinished areas such as plant rooms, electrical rooms and the like shall be
painted with one coat of metal primer after installation.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 36 - Page 2 of 5
 SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Any damage caused to the tray during installation and/or storage, shall be repaired by using zinc rich epoxy primer or
equal alternative, followed by a generous existing metal coating.

B. Joining of various sections of the cable tray and its accessories shall be done in accordance with the recommendations
of the manufacturer, or alternatively by using rustproof mushroom head roofing bolts, nuts and washers.

C. Where necessary, the cutting line of the cable tray shall be through continuous metal parts and not through the
perforations. Burrs or sharp edges shall be removed prior to installation of tray sections and accessories.

D. Fixing and supports shall be installed at regular intervals of 1200 mm and not more than 1500 mm from all bends, tees,
intersections and risers. Mid-span joints between cable tray sections shall be avoided. Joints shall be positioned as
close as practicable to the cable tray supports.

E. A minimum clear space of 25 mm shall be kept behind all installed runs of cable tray. Cables shall be installed on the
trays in a single layer leaving 20 percent spare space on the tray for future use.

F. Cable trays shall provide direct support to the cables without cleats or saddles wherever practicable. Purpose made
straps, cleats or saddles shall however be used to maintain a neat or regular disposition of cables.

G. In vertical tray installation or where trays do not directly support the cables, load bearing cable cleats or saddles shall
be employed and securely fixed to the tray.

H. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed in selection of cable cleats or saddles, on the basis of individual
application.

I. Electromechanical continuity shall be maintained throughout the run of cable trays. Trays carrying LV cables shall be
bonded to earth with green/yellow PVC insulated single core stranded copper cable. Trays carrying ELV cables shall be
bonded to earth with copper strip.

J. LV and ELV cables shall be installed on separate cable trays.

3.2 METAL TRUNKING

A. Trunking runs shall be installed neatly on the surface and be truly vertical, horizontal or parallel with the features of the
building.

B. Trunking shall be sized in accordance with the IEE wiring regulations for sub-main, 600/1000 V grade distribution
cables. A space full factor of 45% shall not be exceeded. For sub-circuit, 450/750V grade wiring, to BS 6004, a space
full factor of 35% shall not be exceeded.

C. Trunking runs shall be mechanically and electrically continuous throughout their length. Brass continuity links shall be
fitted to all trunking joints exterior to the trunking, utilizing brass bolts and vibration proof washers.

D. Multi-compartment trunking shall be used where segregation of services is required, and shall consist of earthed steel
partitions of no less than 0.5mm thickness greater than the gauge of the trunking and be a minimum of 1.0mm
thickness.

E. Compartments shall be drilled to allow conduits to pass through to the compartment served.

F. In situations where tees and junctions are encountered, the multi-compartment fittings shall be of such depth as to allow
for suitable pass-over connections.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 36 - Page 3 of 5
 SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

G. Where vertical runs of trunking exceed 3.0m, appropriate heat barriers shall be provided.

H. Insulated pin racks shall be provided to support cables in vertical runs exceeding 3.0m. Removable cable restraining
straps shall be 'sprung' into trunking at 600mm centers where trunking covers are fixed on the underside or side of the
trunking.

I. Trunking covers shall be the same length as the run, drip-proof, close fitting and of similar protective coating as the
trunking. Cover joints shall not coincide with trunking joints, but be staggered, producing a more rigid construction.
Covers shall only be installed on the underside of trunking in unavoidable circumstances, when approved in writing, by
the Engineer.

J. Trunking shall be securely fixed to the building fabric at intervals not exceeding that specified in the IEE wiring
regulations.

K. Trunking up to 50mm wide shall have one screw at each fixing point. Trunking over 50mm wide shall have two
screws at each fixing point. Screws shall be sherardized Class 1 or stainless steel, No.12 up to 75mm width and No.14
for larger sizes.

L. Manufacturer's standard fittings shall be used. Where these are inadequate, fabricated fittings as approved by the
Engineer shall be accepted. These fittings shall be finished to the same protective coating standard as manufactured
trunking. Bends and tees shall have gusset or radii fittings.

M. Connections to distribution boards shall be made using flanges to allow full trunking capacity future installation of
cables from spare ways.

N. Connections between trunking and apparatus shall utilize a brass male bush coupling and internally serrated washer or
alternatively a standard flanged coupling.

O. Covers shall be removable over the whole length of the trunking. Where trunking passes through walls or floors a
small length of cover must be provided on the section passing through to form a sleeve for 25mm on each side.

P. The separate G/Y insulated protective conductors shall be installed within the trunking system for all circuits and
services.

Q. Trunking shall be installed of multiple runs of conduit and in areas which are fully accessible.

3.3 PVC TRUNKING

A. Trunking runs shall be as described for metal cable trunking only, other will be mentioned pvc trunking.

B. Multi-compartment trunking shall be used where segregation of cables is required, and these shall be cut to allow
conduits to pass through to the appropriate compartment.

C. In concealed conduit installations, recessed boxes shall terminate immediately behind the compartment being served
with cables, fed back entry into the trunking.

D. In situations where tees and junctions are encountered, the multi-compartment fittings shall have sufficient depth to
allow for suitable pass-over connections.

E. Vertical runs of trunking, 5.0m or more shall have suitable heat barriers. PVC trunking shall not pass through fire
compartment walls or floors. Metal cable trunking of the correct classification complete with internal fire barriers shall
be used in these locations. The cover of the PVC trunking shall be removable throughout.

F. For changes in direction, terminations, and tees, manufacturer's fittings shall be used. All bends and tees shall have
gusset or radii fittings to suit bending radii of cables. Site fabricated fittings shall not be permitted.

G. Connections to distribution boards shall be flanged, allowing, full trunking capacity.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 36 - Page 4 of 5
 SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAY, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

H. Insulated pin racks shall be provided to support cables in vertical runs exceeding 3.0m.

I. Retaining straps shall be sprung into trunking at 600mm intervals where trunking covers are fixed to the underside or
side of the trunking.

J. Methods of fixing trunking to the building fabric shall be as described for metal cable trunking except large washers
shall be used at screw fixing points.

K. Covers outside buildings shall be weatherproof.

L. Methods of jointing the trunking utilizing connectors and the fixing of accessories shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.

M. Fixings and connections shall give due allowance for expansion as recommended by the manufacturer or a minimum of
2 mm per meter of length.

3.4 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 260536

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 05 36 - Page 5 of 5
 SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 260923

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. The system shall consist of Lighting control panels separate or built in DB for housing all system devices and related
control equipment, power supply, intelligent low voltage programmable switches, intelligent motion sensors, timers,
Light sensors/photocell, day light sensors.

B. System shall allow ON/OFF control of lighting in a predetermined pattern via switches, timer clocks, light
sensor/photocell and infrared motion sensors.

C. The contractor shall install the required number of intelligent motion sensors, day light sensors to cover all the area
specified based on the mounting height, degree of coverage, and detection range of the selected sensors.

D. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

E. The sequence of lighting control shall be provided as described below.

F. External: External/Landscape lighting shall be controlled through photocell / timer with override switch and LCP.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, DIN/VDE, IEC and BS Standards pertaining to lighting system

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 09 23 - Page 1 of 3
 SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL

A. There shall be a dedicated or in built with DB as per Engineer approval Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for every Normal
or Emergency panel.

B. The DB with LCP shall house the system devices and the related control equipment depending on the number of
circuits being controlled.

C. The DB with LCP shall be with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the control equipment.

D. Switch actuator at different brightness levels.

2.2 PHOTOCELL

A. Photocell sensor shall be provided for on / off control for lights in external area. It shall consist of switch, 3-channel
with mounting bracket for wall mounting.

B. Protection - IP-54 acc. DIN 40 050

C. Operating temperature - +40oC to +70oC

D. Connection lighting sensor - 3 screw terminals connection cross section 0.5 to 1.5mm2

E. Sensor shall be installed in roof of ancillary buildings such substation and shall be coordinated with location of
respective lighting circuit DBs.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 09 23 - Page 2 of 3
 SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Contractor shall install all lighting control system equipment shown on the relevant drawings and required as per the
specifications described in this section, all as per manufacturer’s recommendations and complying with the above
regulations.

B. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting control systems are to be installed and notify in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work.

3.2 TESTING & COMMISSIONING

A. Check for installation of lighting control panels at site and installation of devices in the panel and in the field.

B. Test the respective lighting circuits to be ON as per the Electrical Load Schedule.

C. Demonstrate and explain the system operation to the site technicians.

D. Hand-over the control system to client’s authorized personnel.

3.3 SPARE PARTS / EXTRA MATERIALS

A. The contractor shall supply to the owner’s stores spare parts for two years’ operation, from the date of final handing
over of the project, as generally, but not limited to the items listed hereunder:

B. A minimum of 5% of the total number of switches, lighting control modules, for any other accessories used in the
project shall be provided.

C. Any other items as recommended by the manufacturer to cover the period indicated above and to client approval.

3.4 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 260926

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 09 23 - Page 3 of 3
 SECTION 26 12 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFOREMER AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 261200

DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

B. This Section includes supply, installation, testing and commissioning of distribution transformers dry type rated as
indicated, 3 Phase 50 Hz.

C. The dry type Transformer shall be suitable for continuous indoor operation in a tropical extreme climate on a 3 phase
distribution system with solidly earthed neutral.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

Power Distribution Transformers shall be provided in accordance with QGEWC latest specifications and the
International Standards referred to here below: Power Distribution transformers shall be submitted for QGEWC
approval.
BS EN ISO 1461:2009 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Articles.

BS 381C 1980 Specification for Colors for Identification, Coding, and

Special Purposes
BS 3692 ISO Metric Precision Hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts
BS 4190 ISO Metric Black Hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts
BS 7079, BS EN ISO 8501, BS EN ISO 8503 Surface Finish of Blast Cleaned Steel for Painting
BS 2562 1979 Specification for Cable Boxes for Transformers and Reactors
BS EN ISO 12944, BS EN ISO 14713 Code of Practice for Protective coating for Iron and Steel
Structures against Corrosion
BS 6435 1984 Specifications for Unfilled Enclosures for the Dry Termination
of HV Cables for Transformers and Reactors
BS IEC 60076, BS IEC 60078 Power Transformers
IEC 296/BS 148 Insulating Oil for Transformers and Switchgear
IEC 529/BS 5420 Specification for Degrees of protection Provided by Enclosures
BS EN 60076. IEC 60076 Method of Measurement of Transformer and Reactor Sound
Levels
IEC 726 Cast risen transformers
QGEWC latest requirements for Power distribution transformers.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 12 00 - Page 1 of 5
 SECTION 26 12 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFOREMER AND ACCESSORIES

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Dry Type Transformer

A. Dry Type Transformers shall be of low loss and low noise level with rated power and voltage as indicated on the
drawings.

B. Dry Type Transformers shall be with star connection at LV side, 6% impendence, 50HZ rated frequency, 100°C
MV/LV temperature rise.

C. Magnetic core shall be made from laminations of grain oriented silicon steel, insulated with mineral oxide and shall be
protected against corrosion with a coat of varnish.

D. LV windings shall be made from aluminum or copper foil with class F interlayer insulation by encapsulation
(impregnation) with synthetic alkyd resin or equivalent.

E. MV windings shall be independent of the LV windings and will be made of aluminum or copper wire or foil with class
F insulation.

F. The MV windings shall be vacuum cast in a class F fireproof epoxy resin casting system composed of an epoxy resin,
an anhydride hardener with flexibilising additive.

G. The flame-retardant filler shall be thoroughly mixed with the resin and hardener and casting system shall be class F.

H. Transformers shall be equipped with a thermal protection device which comprise of PTC sensors set, one sensor for
“Alarm 1”, one for “Alarm 2” per phase and installed in the coils of the transformer and placed in a tube to enable them
to be replaced if ever necessary.

I. Transformers shall be equipped with an electronic converter with two independent monitoring circuits equipped with a
changeover switch, one for “Alarm 1” the other for “Alarm2”.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 12 00 - Page 2 of 5
 SECTION 26 12 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFOREMER AND ACCESSORIES

J. Transformers shall be equipped with the relays that shall be indicated by different colored indicator lights. A third
indicator light shall indicate the presence of voltage. These three indicator lights shall be on the front of the converter.
The electronic converter shall be installed away from the transformer.

K. The PTC sensors shall be supplied, assembled and wired to the terminal block fixed on the upper part of the
transformer.

L. The converter shall be supplied loose with the transformer, packaged complete with its wiring diagram.

M. The transformer shall be made for AN cooling.

N. The transformer shall be rated for operation in an ambient temperature of 50 degree C, at full rated load and allow for
1 Nominal Voltage 11kv
2 Maximum Voltage 12kv
3 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
The LV System has 5 wires i.e. 3 Phase + Neutral + Earth. Neutral and earth is directly
shorted at the Distribution Substation end. A consumer earth terminal is provided.
4 Nominal Voltage 415/240V
5 Highest Symmetrical fault level 44kA
any required de-rating to achieve this.

O. CHARACTERISTICS

2.2 ACCESSORIES AND STANDARD EQUIPMENT

A. Transformers shall be equipped with 4 flat bi-directional rollers, Lifting lugs, Haulage holes on the under base,
Earthing Terminals, Rating plate on the front face of the MV side, “Danger Electricity” warning label (T 10 warning).

B. Contractor shall provide routine tests certificate, Instruction manual for installation, commissioning, and maintenance.

C. The IP degree of protection and rubber sound isolator for transformer housing shall be in compliance with local
authority requirements.

D. The Transformer construction and technical specification shall be in compliance with local authority requirements.

E. Restricted Earth Fault protection shall be provided between secondary side of the transformer and main incoming side
of the MV panel.

2.3 ENCLOSURE/CABLE BOX

A. Enclosure shall be manufactured from electro zinc coated mild steel plate.

B. The enclosure shall be equipped with a MV and LV cable box and at the long side of the transformer.

C. In case of 1600 KVA transformer the size of the cable box shall be ample to accommodate one 3 core cable at the MV
side with cable entrance from bottom or top as agreed and 7 numbers of single core 800 sq mm Cu, XLPE/CWA/PVC
cables or 2500A busway as indicated at the LV side.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 12 00 - Page 3 of 5
 SECTION 26 12 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFOREMER AND ACCESSORIES

D. In case of 1000 KVA transformer the size of the cable box shall be ample to accommodate one 3 core cable at the MV
side with cable entrance from bottom or top as agreed and 7 numbers of single core 630 sq mm Cu, XLPE/CWA/PVC
cables or 1600A busway as indicated at the LV side.

E. Gland plates with cable glands shall be provided. Removable panels shall allow access for cable termination and to the
reconnection links.

F. The LV terminals shall be designed in the way to allow the termination of ample number of cables.

G. The MV winding shall be equipped with tappings at –5,-2.5, 0, + 2.5, + 5% of the rated voltage.

H. The tapings shall be internally connectable by links which shall be located at the dome of the MV winding and shall
form part of the delta connection.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 12 00 - Page 4 of 5
 SECTION 26 12 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFOREMER AND ACCESSORIES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Transformers shall be dry type (cast resin) suitable for indoor installations or transformer shall be oil submerge type
suitable for outdoor installations.

B. Transformers shall be installed in Transformer Room and it shall be coordinated with civil work and according to
authorities' standard and approval of Engineer.

C. The Contractor shall provide all facilities for the installation of transformers and associated switchgear.

D. The Contractor shall allow and provide heavy equipment such as Forklift or Crane for the installation of the
transformers.

E. The equipment capacity and specifications shall be suitable for the transformer weights and for the all the ramps, doors,
plinths, etc.

3.2 TESTING

A. All the test shall be carried out in accordance with Harmonization Document HD 464 S1:1988, the IEC 726 and IEC
76-1 to 76-5 standards

B. Routine Tests shall be carried out on all transformers after manufacturing, enabling an official test certificate to be
produced for each one:

1. Measurement of windings resistance

2. Measurement of the transformation ratios and vector group
3. Measurement of impedance voltage and load loss
4. Measurement of no load loss and no load current
5. Applied voltage dielectric test
6. Induced voltage dielectric test
7. Measurement of partial discharges
8. Lightning impulse test
9. Short circuit test
10. Noise level measurements

3.3 CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cleaning of Services, accessories and equipment, which have been supplied
and/or installed as part of the contract to which these general requirements apply.

B. Cleaning shall be undertaken immediately prior to handover.

3.4 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 261200

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 12 00 - Page 5 of 5
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 262300

LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. This Part specifies the requirements for Low Voltage Panel.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

B. The LVP shall include bus bars, circuit breakers and/or fusible switches, and all necessary parts to install a complete
distribution board, as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Low Voltage Panel shall be provided in accordance with QGEWC latest specifications and the International Standards

B. The Type Tested and Partially Type Tested Assemblies is as per BS EN 60439-1:1994.

C. The specification for Copper for Electrical Purposes is as per BS 1433:1970.

D. Code of Practice for Earthing is as per BS 7430:1991.

E. Colors for Indications Lights & Pushbuttons is as per BS EN 60043:1993

F. Circuit Breakers are as per EN 60947-2.

G. Circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 947-2 (EN 60947-2) and short circuit category ICS.

H. Test certificate from independent laboratory to certify that the MCCB's comply with the IEC-947-2, (EN 60947-2) test
sequence -2 shall be submitted when required by Engineer.

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission Low Voltage Panel as specified.

B. The LVP shall be complete with metering and instrumentation, special tools, accessories, test equipment, etc, shall
be in compliance with QGEWC latest standards.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the latest version of QGEWC specification for LVP and shall be
responsible for obtaining QGEWC approval.

D. The product selected and proposed shall include manufacturer's instructions that indicate application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by the product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 1 of 8
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

E. The contractor shall provide full technical details of the proposed LVP together with a copy of all relevant standards for
review and comment by the Engineer, prior to submission to QGEWC for approval.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Control (QC) Plan or Inspection Test Plan (ITP). In
particular the main equipment manufacturing stages sanctioned by appropriate tests such as: incoming components
inspection, discrete sub-assembly tests and complete functional checks on the final product. Final inspection and
calibration operations shall be documented in a report drawn up by the supplier’s Quality Inspection department.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ASSEMBLY

A. The LVP shall be type tested in accordance with BS EN 60439-1 copy of test certificate from independent laboratory
confirming that all type tests mentioned under BS EN 60439-1 are passed, shall be submitted.

B. The panel enclosure construction shall conform to Form-3B Type-2.

C. The assembly shall be 600V Rating, indoor gasketed type of size, rating and arrangement as indicated on the Drawings.

D. The complete assembly shall be ground mounting type with matching cases to form continuous internal struc-
tures.

E. The arrangement of the equipment within the assemblies shall be individually-mounting type in a modular
arrangement and shall be such as to afford maximum accessibility to all parts, incoming and outgoing wires and
cables.

F. The assembly shall be completely wired and tested at the factory, ready for installation when received at the site.
Bracing shall be provided to prevent distortion in handling and shipping.

G. The assembly shall be suitably braced for the short circuit duty shown on the Drawings, at nominal operating voltage.

H. Approved nameplates, permanently mounted for identification of all major and control equipment shall be
provided

I. The enclosure and other steel works of LVP shall pass through a four stage finishing process such as chemical spray,
degreasing, iron phosphate and finally give a top coat of polyester powder electrostatically deposited and cured in a
high temperature oven to give a strong molecular bonding with the steel.

J. The final color of the enclosure shall be as per the manufacturer’s standard. All steel screws, nuts, bolts, shall be zinc
plated and passivized to prevent rusting.

K. The assembly shall consist of a completely enclosed self supporting metal structure, containing circuit protective
devices and all other associated equipment as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified under other Clauses.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 2 of 8
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

L. The assembly shall consist of the required number of formed and welded sheet steel enclosures required to mount
circuit protective devices and other equipment.

M. Bolted frames shall be provided at the rear to support and house copper busbars, cables and other accessories.

N. Front, side and top plates shall be steel, removable and not less than 2 mm thickness.

O. All fastenings between structural members shall be bolted, not welded to provide flexibility during installation.

P. Removable panels shall be provided at the front of each vertical section.

Q. The arrangement shall permit cables to enter from bottom and top of the enclosure and connect to their respective
terminals without interference. The assembly shall be provided with cable racks and bolting down holes.

R. A modular individual mounting arrangement (in Form of Construction) as indicated on the drawings) shall be used and
the internal separations shall be carried out using rigid barriers or partitions.

S. Structure and buses shall be arranged to permit future sections to be added. Suitable cover plate must be provided for
temporary protection.

T. The assembly shall be vermin and rodent proof. Protection shall be to IP41 as a minimum requirement unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2.2 BUSBARS

A. The busbars shall be electro-tinned hard drawn, high conductivity 99.9 % purity, suitably sleeved for phase
identification to BS 158.

B. All busbars shall extend through the length of the board with same cross section throughout unless indicated
otherwise.

2
C. A copper Earth Busbar sized at least 50 % of the phase busbars or 300 mm , whichever is greater, shall be
provided along the full length of the board.

D. Busbars shall be adequately supported by porcelain or moulded insulators spaced on suitable centres so that the
complete assembly can withstand the maximum mechanical stresses to which it may be subjected to under fault
condition.

E. Unless otherwise stipulated in the particular specification or drawings busbars shall be housed in separate adequately
ventilated compartment which shall not contain any wiring or apparatus other than that required for connections for
busbars

F. Rating of bus bar as indicated on the drawings.

G. The mechanical and dielectric strength of bus bars and supports shall be capable of withstanding the worst conditions
of electrical surge, which can occur in the installation

H. Bus bars shall be sleeved for phase identification by using high temperature grade heat shrinkable colored PVC sleeving
throughout its length. In no circumstances will any kind of wrapping tape be accepted on busbars.

I. All three phases and the neutral busbar shall be of same size enclosed in a common separate chamber.

J. the mains horizontal busbars shall be housed in a separate chamber located on the top of the assembly. Busbars located
elsewhere not on the Top shall be accepted at the discretion of the Engineer after verifying the certification, site
location, available space and considering other factors necessary for ease in operation and maintenance of the
assemblies. Insulation barriers shall be provided at each cubicle division.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 3 of 8
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

K. Vertical busbars shall be fully enclosed in a separate chamber.

L. Bus bars connections shall be identified by phase color marking and adequately supported by suitable supports
designed to withstand the full fault capacity as specified herein.

M. Connections from the main bus bars to MCCB‟s controlling main motor starters and outgoing distribution feeder shall
be via solid copper bus bars

N. Connections to busbars shall take the form of rigid bolted copper strips. Caliper sliding connections or similar movable
contacts shall not operate directly onto the busbars or down-droppers.

O. The utilization of “Fault Free Zones” will be permitted for the connection between the busbar risers and functional
units rated 32 amps or below. These may be of copper conductors of solid rigid manufacture or insulated flexible
conductors provided that they are securely fastened, provided in both cases that under normal operating condition
an internal short circuit is only a remote possibility. For all functional units the connections between the busbar and the
functional units should be sized to the frame rating of the short circuit protection device in the functional unit and an
ASTA/KEMA certificate for their short circuit let though (I2T) capability shall be provided.

P. Bolted copper bus bar links shall be provided where specified and shall be used for maintenance purposes only. The
link section shall be easily accessible from the front or top of the board and shall have a lockable cover. Provision for
storing the links nuts and bolts shall be made in the switchboard.

Q. the temperature rise of busbars shall be limited to that which will not cause damage to the insulating material when
carrying their rated current at the site ambient temperature and shall in any case not exceed 60°c reduced by
the amount the site ambient temperature exceeds 40°c.

R. The neutral shall be solidly earthed at the MCC. The neutral-earth link shall be adjacent to the incomer,
externally labeled and be easily accessible

2.3 LABELS

A. All enclosures containing functional units shall be clearly labelled with a circuit unit reference and current rating in
English and Arabic. Every functional unit shall be labelled separately from all others. External labels shall have letters
not less the 5 mm in height and internal labels not less than 3 mm. The letters shall be black on white background.

B. All covers/doors not fitted with interlock switched disconnectors enclosing unshrouded live equipment, shall be fitted
with warning labels inscribed "Danger-Isolate before Opening" in English and Arabic.

C. Warning labels shall have black letters on bright yellow background. Whenever possible, letters shall be not less than
30 mm in height. On small covers and doors 20 mm or 10 mm high letters shall be used.

D. All terminal blocks shall be labeled relative to respective functional unit. Every control and metering device, switch,
pushbutton, indicator lamp, etc., shall be labeled to indicate its purpose.

E. Main identification labels shall be provided on the assembly together with its rating plate.

F. Fixed and withdraw able portions of equipment, including fixed and plug in devices shall be labeled with both with
draw able and fixed part.

2.4 SELECTOR SWITCH/PUSH BUTTONS/INDICATOR LAMP

A. Selector switches shall be of the rotary type with lever or key operated actuators as specified in the schedules. Push
button shall be of the flush type with colors in accordance with BSEN 60043:1993.

B. Pushbuttons for emergency stop purpose shall be of mushroom head type, with twist to release action or key reset
facility as specified.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 4 of 8
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

C. Contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts in NO or NC configuration rated at not less than 5A
resistive at 240V, 50Hz.

D. Indicating lamps shall be of the flush type, 22 mm diameter, with removable colored lenses to permit replacement of
lamps from the front. Colors shall be in accordance with BS 4094.

E. Indicating lamps on control circuits shall be equipped with completely sealed dual wound safety isolating transformers.
Lamp test facility shall be provided.

2.5 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

A. Circuit breakers shall be moulded case type, totally front accessible and front connectable. The breakers shall be
mounted in the distribution board to permit installation, maintenance and testing without reaching over any live side
bussing.

B. All line and load side connections shall be individual to each breaker. No common mounting of electrical bus
connectors will be acceptable. Line side breaker connections shall be bolt-on type. Breaker connections requiring leaf
and coil springs which could loosen or fly apart during a fault are not acceptable.

C. Frame shall be constructed from molded and/or glass polyester material.

D. The operating mechanism shall be toggle type quick-make, quick-break, trip-free, with three different positions for ON,
OFF & TRIP.

E. Circuit breakers shall incorporate an arc-extinguishing compartment such that when the contacts are opened, the arc
drawn shall induce a magnetic field in the grids, which in turn, shall draw the arc from the contacts and into the
grids, thus splitting the arc into smaller arcs and extinguish very rapidly.

F. The trip element shall be a bi-metal for overload and an electromagnet for short circuit.

G. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB) breakers shall be electronic type with adjustable, setting for overload and
short circuit. The breaker should have a facility to test the tripping circuit of the MCCB by inducing an electrical pulse
from portable unit.

H. Breakers shall be manually operated with store energy spring load. Breakers shall be ambient compensated type
with a built-in compensator to carry rated load at 50 degrees centigrade.

I. Breakers shall have 240/415 volt duty rating, and a minimum symmetrical short circuit interrupting rating equal to
25 kA for main distribution boards associated with 1600 kVA transformers

J. Each breaker shall be supplied with an externally operable mechanical means to trip the circuit breaker.

K. Key interlocks for circuit breakers where indicated shall incorporate a plunger that blocks the breaker in the open
position. Key removal shall be possible in such a way to achieve the desired interlocking system.

L. Where required, breakers shall be suitable for busway connection.

M. Main breaker shall be insulated case type provided with interchangeable trip units, current transformers, flux-transfer
short trip and solid state circuiting.

N. The Contractor shall be responsible to submit discrimination studies for the approved circuit breakers ratings for
Engineers review and approval.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 5 of 8
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

2.6 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ACB)

A. Circuit Breakers rating above 630A shall be Air Circuit Breakers as per KAHRAMAA regulation.

B. Air circuit breakers shall be totally withdrawable type completely self-contained in an enclosed housing to be mounted
in a switchboard cubicle without additional screening.

C. It shall occupy a complete section, completely segregated from all other parts of the switchboard. Vent holes shall be
provided in the side of the circuit breaker housing to provide thermal ventilation and also to permit easy air flow
through the arc chutes when interrupting a short circuit. The circuit breaker shall be installed in an enclosure greater
than twice the breaker volume.

D. Air circuit breakers shall be equipped with solid state microprocessor based protection unit.

E. The protection unit shall not require any external power supply. It shall have adjustable long time protection for
overload, adjustable instantaneous short circuit protection and earth fault protection for the incoming air circuit
breakers. The outgoing air circuit breakers shall have, adjustable long time protection for overload and adjustable
instantaneous short circuit protection only. The protection unit shall have magnetic trip indicator and shall be adjustable
for ambient temperature up to 70 degree C.

F. Operating mechanism shall be of the trip free spring assisted hand closing type. It shall include a slow close feature for
checking contact operation and adjustment. A flag type indicator shall indicate the ON or OFF position.

G. Air circuit breakers shall be of the triple pole or four-pole as specified in the schedules or as indicated on the drawings.
Where four pole breakers are called for, one pole shall be a full sized switched neutral.

H. The air circuit breaker shall be closed and opened by a stored energy spring charged operated, mechanism. The
operating mechanism shall be designed in such a way that the excess energy at the end of a closing cycle is used to
partially recharge the closing spring.

I. Also the opening springs shall be automatically charged during the closing operation.

J. The air circuit breaker shall in addition have adjustable short time delay in both current and time directions, and
adjustable instantaneous trip in the current direction.

K. All contacts subject to arcing shall be tipped with arc resistant material and shall require minimum maintenance
after short circuit interruption. The main contacts shall be silver faced to ensure complete reliability in service
under onerous current loading or ambient conditions.

L. The arc chutes shall be of special design employing steel splitter plates. The plates shall be arranged so that the arc
is rapidly de-ionized while it is contained within the chute structure and the plate spacing shall be such that back
pressure is minimized. The complete chute assembly shall be easily removed for routine inspection of the chute and
contacts.

M. Isolating contacts shall be multi-finger spring loaded type which shall be silver plated and shall require no attention.

N. A front operated racking mechanism shall cause withdrawal of breaker. Access shall be via a lower cover.

O. Safety shutters of insulation material shall be provided to prevent access to live connections in the inspection position
or when the breaker is completely withdrawn.

P. Interlocks shall be provided to prevent being isolated unless it is in the OFF position and also to prevent the breaker
being racked into the service position unless it is in OFF position. Interlocks shall also prevent the breaker being
accidentally pulled completely off the guide rail and prevent the independent manual operated breaker being "slow
closed" in the service position. Provision shall be made for padlocking the safety shutters when the breaker is
completely withdrawn.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 6 of 8
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

Q. Locks shall be provided to prevent access to the time lag dashpots and racking mechanism, preventing unauthorized
adjustment of the trip setting, also enabling the circuit breaker to be locked in the isolated position thus disconnecting
the supply.

R. Breakers shall be ambient compensated type with a built in compensatory to carry rated load at 50o C.

S. Air circuit breakers shall conform to IEC-947-2 (EN 60947-2).

T. An earth terminal shall be provided at the rear of withdraw able breaker housing connected to a plug and socket
contact, to provide an earth connection to the moving breaker portion. Contacts shall be maintained in the breaker
isolated portion.

U. Short circuit performance shall comply with IEC-947-2 (EN 60947-2), including make-break tests at up to 50 KA RMS
and 100 KA peak with minimum recovery voltages of 550 volts.

V. Mechanical endurance shall ensure over 30,000 operations with only minor maintenance.

W. A non re-settable number of operation counters shall be provided.

X. Suitable cable glands shall be provided for the support of the incoming supply cables.

2.7 KILOWATT-HOUR METERING COMPARTMENT

A. In main distribution boards, where kilowatt-hour meters are indicated or are implied, a separate compartment shall be
provided in the distribution board for this purpose including the meter, to the approval of the local power authorities.

2.8 VOLT METER, AMMETER & POWER FACTOR METER

A. Volt meters, Ammeters and PF meters shall be of digital type and shall be fitted into the front of panels.

B. The meters shall have dielectric strength of 2kV at 50 Hz for 1 minute with 7 segments displays at the figure height of
20mm.

C. Meters shall have 4 digits display and shall have an accuracy of 1% or better.

2.9 PROTECTION

A. General Earthing protection with all necessary connections shall be provided through dedicated earth pits for LV
panels.

B. Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection shall be provided on incomer side of LVP connected to secondary side of
transformer, as per KAHRAMAA regulations.

C. Surge protection shall be provided on incomer side of LVP to protect from any voltage spikes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. The main distribution board assembly shall be tested at factory in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 60439-1
and the associated standards.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 7 of 8
 SECTION 26 23 00
LV FACTORY BUILT ASSEMBLIES

B. Work tests shall include inspection of all components, wiring and a complete electrical functioning test.

C. Protection relays shall be tested by primary current injection method, with currents equal to overload, short circuit and
earth fault conditions.

D. After completion of installation of the switchgear assemblies on site, they shall be subjected to the routine tests as
defined in BS EN 60439-1.

E. All functional units shall be checked for correct mechanical operation.

F. Panel performance test and inspection shall be carried out at factory in presence of Engineer before bring to site

3.2 EARTHING

A. An acceptable terminal bar for equipment earthing conductors shall be provided with minimum number of cable
terminations equal to the single pole number of ways of the panel board.

B. Cabinets shall be provided with an earth connector welded to it.

3.3 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 262300

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 23 00 - Page 8 of 8
 SECTION 26 24 13
SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

SECTION 262413

SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

B. The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission Submain Distribution Boards complete as herein specified and
as shown on the drawings, consisting of voltmeters, ammeters and instrument transformers where required and as
indicated in the schematic diagrams.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Sub-main Distribution Board shall conform to - BS EN 60439-1:1994.

B. Feeder Pillar - IEC 60439

C. Cabinet color - BS381C.

D. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker - IEC-439-1 (EN 60439-1)

E. Requirements for type tested - BS EN 60439-1 1994

F. Partially type tested assemblies - EN 60898

G. Specification for Color identification - BS 381 C: 1988.

H. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed and meet NEMA Standard No. AB1-1975, and Federal Specification W-C-
375B/GEN where applicable.

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 13 - Page 1 of 4
 SECTION 26 24 13
SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINETS AND FRONTS

A. Distribution board assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. Cabinet shall be of sufficient size to provide a
minimum gutter space of 10 cm on all sides. The thickness of the sheet steel shall be minimum 2 mm.

B. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, brushed stainless steel cylinder tumbler - type locks with catches and spring
loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the adjustable indicating trim clamps which
shall be completely concealed when the doors are closed.

C. Fronts shall have approved directories with name of panel, number of phases, wires and voltage written on them. Doors
shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position.
A Circuit directory card shall provide a space of at least 0.8cm high x 7cm long or equivalent for each circuit.

D. The panel shall be suitable for wall mounting.

E. The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.

F. Fronts shall be of powder coated electro galvanized sheet steel. Color shall be grey or acceptable equal.

G. Joints shall be welded, galvanized and reinforced where necessary and galvanized after fabrication.

2.2 SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD BUS ASSEMBLY

A. Bus for connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "Distributed Phase" or "Phase Sequence" Type.

B. Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected to
each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole breakers can be installed at any location. All
current carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated.

C. Main and neutral buses shall be minimum 98% conductivity rectangular copper bars, provided with bolted-type lugs as
necessary.

D. Buses shall be rigidly supported and insulated and be so designed that branch circuits can be removed without
disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional machining, drilling or tapping.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 13 - Page 2 of 4
 SECTION 26 24 13
SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

E. Necessary bussing, drilling and blank plates shall be provided for installation of future circuits when so indicated in the
Schedules on the Drawings.

F. All screws and bolts used for making copper connections shall be equipped with lock washers. Riveted connections
will not be acceptable.

G. Mains shall be equipped with solder less pressure indent type connectors and shall have means to prevent swiveling of
connector.

H. Neutral busbars shall be full size and shall incorporate one neutral terminal for each single pole and neutral way.

I. Aluminum shall not be used for any interior panel board parts.

J. Back pan or mounting on which buses and branches are mounted shall be rigid to properly support the component
parts.

K. Reinforcing of back pan shall be by flanging or addition of angle iron.

L. Buses, connectors, and terminals shall be silver plated to a minimum thickness of 0.1mm.

M. Sub-main Distribution Board shall be equipped with thermal magnetic type moulded case circuit breakers of frame size
and trip ratings as indicated on the drawings.

N. The bus bar structure and the main breaker shall have current ratings as shown on the drawings. The main incomer
shall be either an automatic or non-automatic moulded case circuit breaker as indicated on the drawings.

O. Sub-main Distribution Board shall have, 415 V, 3-phase, 50 Hz duty rating and shall have short circuit interrupting
capacity equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the drawings.

2.3 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

A. Moulded case circuit breakers shall have trip settings, and number of poles, as indicated on the Drawings. All circuit
breakers shall have their ampere trip rating clearly marked and visible.

B. Breakers shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanisms; and shall provide positive trip-free operation on
abnormal overloads. Stationary and movable contacts shall be adequately protected with effective and rapid arc
interruption. Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with an inverse time delay thermal over current trip element
and magnetic instantaneous overcurrent trip elements for common tripping of all poles for multiple breakers. Multiple
pole breakers shall have a single handle mechanism. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by the breaker handle
assuming a clearly distinctive position from the manual ON and OFF position.

C. All MCCB of rating 100 Amps and above shall have adjustable thermal and magnetic facilities.

D. Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacities at 415 V equal to the values indicated
below for moulded case circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.

E. MCCB shall in no case be less than the busbar short circuit bracing of the distribution board 25kA for 3 second.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 13 - Page 3 of 4
 SECTION 26 24 13
SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUB-MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Sub-main distribution board shall be aligned, leveled and securely fastened to the building.

B. All unused openings in Sub-main distribution board cabinets shall be properly closed.

C. Sub-main distribution board interiors shall not be installed in cabinets until all conduit connections to the cabinet have
been completed.

D. Trim shall be installed plumb and square to the enclosure finish.

E. Trim for flush mounted cabinets shall be installed in plaster frame, flush with finished wall.

F. Concealed surfaces of cabinets shall be given on site a heavy application of emulsified asphalt prior to installation.

G. Free standing sub-main distribution boards when installed in electrical closets, or rooms with raised floors shall be
provided with galvanized steel support structures to raise the level of the panel to 10 cm above the original floor level.

3.2 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 262413

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 13 - Page 4 of 4
 SECTION 26 24 16
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

SECTION 262416

DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall supply and install the distribution boards (DB, EDB) as indicated in the Schedules, where
shown on the Drawings, and as herein specified.

C. They shall include bus assembly, cabinet and front, circuit breakers and all necessary parts to install complete
distribution boards.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Distribution boards shall conform to BS EN 60439-1:1994 and EN 60898.

B. Color shall be gray to ANSI No. 61, BS 381 C or approved equal.

C. Miniature circuit breakers shall have tripping characteristics in accordance with EN 60898 in an ambient temperature of
50 deg. C.

D. Requirements for type tested or - BS EN 60439-1 1994

E. Partially type tested assemblies - EN 60898

F. Specification for Color identification - BS 381 C: 1988.

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 16 - Page 1 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 16
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINETS AND FRONTS

A. The distribution board bus assembly shall be enclosed in a galvanized sheet steel fully rust-proofed cabinet. Cabinet
shall be of sufficient size to provide a minimum gutter space of 10 cm on all sides. The thickness of the sheet steel shall
be minimum 1.5 mm and shall be protected to IP 32 for internal use with neoprene gaskets for the doors.

B. Distribution Boards shall be flush mounted type, or surface mounted type and shall be mounted separately from motor
control centres or switchboards. The boards shall be totally enclosed, dust protected, vermin proof type. Distribution
boards installed in all plant rooms and other process areas shall be corrosion resistant.

C. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, brushed stainless steel cylinder tumbler-type locks with catches and spring
loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All distribution board locks shall be
keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim clamps which shall be completely concealed when the doors
are closed. Fronts shall have approved directories with name of panel, number of phases, wires and voltage written on
them.

D. Doors shall be mounted by completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked
position. A circuit directory card shall provide a space at least 0.5 cm high x 7 cm long or equivalent for each circuit.

E. The directory card shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit.

F. Fronts shall be of code gauge, full finished steel with rust-inhibiting primer and baked enamel finish.
Joints shall be welded, galvanized and reinforced where necessary and galvanized after fabrication.

G. Distribution Boards (DB) located remote from the main switch boards shall be mounted at a height of not less than
1200mm from finished floor level to bottom of the DB and maximum height of this DB shall be 2200mm from finished
floor level to top of DB.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION BOARD BUS ASSEMBLY

A. Bus for connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the "Distributed Phase" or "Phase Sequence" Type.

B. Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole breakers are individually connected
to each of the three different phases in such a manner that two or three pole breakers can be installed at any
location. All current carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be plated.

C. Main and neutral buses shall be minimum 98 percent purity, rectangular copper bars, provided with bolted-type lugs as
necessary.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 16 - Page 2 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 16
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

D. Buses of miniature circuit breaker distribution boards shall be suitably braced for a minimum short circuit duty equal to
10,000 Amps unless otherwise indicated.

E. Buses shall be rigidly supported and insulated and be so designed that branch circuits can be removed without
disturbing adjacent units or changed without additional machining, drilling or tapping.

F. Necessary bussing, drilling and blank plates shall be provided for installation of future circuits when so indicated in the
Schedules on the Drawings.

G. All screws and bolts used for making copper connections shall be equipped with lock washers. Riveted connections
will not be acceptable.

H. Mains shall be equipped with solderless pressure indent type connectors and have means to prevent swiveling of
connector.

I. Neutral terminal strip shall be full size and shall incorporate one neutral terminal for each single pole and neutral way.

J. Aluminum shall not be used for any interior parts of the distribution board.

K. Back pan or mounting on which buses and branches are mounted shall be rigid to properly support the component
parts.

L. Reinforcing of back pan shall be by flanging or addition of angle iron.

M. Buses, connectors, and terminals shall be silver plated to a minimum thickness of 0.1 mm.

N. Distribution boards shall be factory assembled.

O. Distribution boards shall be of a dead-front safety type, equipped with protective devices as shown on the Schedules.

P. Distribution boards shall have 415 V volt duty rating, with other ratings as shown on the Drawings.

Q. Distribution boards circuit numbering shall be such that, starting at the top, odd number shall be used in sequence down
the left-hand side and even numbers shall be used in sequence down the right-hand side.

R. Distribution boards shall incorporate plug-in type miniature circuit breakers of tripping characteristics B, C or D for
lighting, miscellaneous power or motor loads as necessary complete as specified and as shown on the drawings and to
the acceptance of Engineer.

S. Main breakers of all main breaker type distribution boards shall be plug in type miniature circuit breaker or bolt-on
moulded case type circuit breaker as shown on the drawings.

2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. All plug-in type and bolt-on moulded case circuit breakers shall have trip settings, and number of poles, as indicated on
the Drawings. All circuit breakers shall have their ampere trip rating clearly marked and visible.

B. Breakers shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanism and shall provide positive trip-free operation on
abnormal overloads. Stationary and movable contacts shall be adequately protected with effective and rapid arc
interruption. Each pole of the breaker shall be equipped with an inverse time delay thermal over current trip
element and magnetic instantaneous over current trip elements for common tripping of all poles for multiple
breakers. Multiple pole breakers shall have a single handle mechanism. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by the
breaker handle assuming a clearly distinctive position from the manual ON and OFF position.

C. Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacities equal to 10,000 Amps at 415 V for
miniature circuit breakers and capacities equal to the values indicated in the drawings for moulded case circuit
breakers but shall in no case be less than the busbar short circuit bracing of the distribution board.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 16 - Page 3 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 16
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

D. Moulded case circuit breakers shall have frame sizes equal to or greater than their trip ratings unless otherwise
indicated and shall be suitable for operation at an ambient temperature of 50 degree C.

2.4 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Each leakage circuit breakers shall be current operated type providing protection against overloads, short circuit, and
low level earth faults of 30 mA or 100 mA as applicable or as shown on the drawings.

B. It shall fit in standard distribution boards.

C. A push-to-test mechanism shall be provided to ensure proper operation.

D. Enclosure shall be glass fiber reinforced, plastic (GRP) construction.

E. Breaker shall have 6000A interrupting capacity unless otherwise indicated.

F. Breaker shall in other respects be similar to miniature circuit breakers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DISTRIBUTION BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Distribution board shall be aligned, leveled and securely fastened to the building sub-base for surface mounted
application or recessed in the wall for flush mounted distribution board.

B. The Contractor shall submit details of proposed equipment and method of installation to the Engineer and QGEWC for
approval prior to commencement of installation work.

C. Connecting conduits shall not be used to support the distribution board.

D. All unused openings in distribution board cabinets shall be properly closed.

E. Distribution board interiors shall not be installed in cabinets until all conduit connections to the cabinet have been
completed.

F. Trim for flush mounted cabinets shall be installed in plaster frame, flush with finished wall.

G. Trim shall be installed plumb and square to enclosure finish.

H. Concealed surfaces of cabinets shall be given on site a heavy application of emulsified asphalt prior to installation.

3.2 EARTHING

A. An acceptable terminal bar for equipment earthing conductors shall be provided with a minimum number of
cable terminations equal to the single pole number of ways of the distribution board.

B. A cable connection shall be made from the earth bar to the cable gland of the incoming feeder as applicable.

C. Cabinet shall be provided with an earth connector welded to it.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 16 - Page 4 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 16
DISTRIBUTION BOARD AND DEVICES

3.2 MANUFACTURERS :

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 262416

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 16 - Page 5 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

SECTION 262419

MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section is to be read in conjunction with relevant items of all sections and drawings issued for this proposed
works.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 AND UDC GUIDELINE and in case of conflict between
contract documents, and the standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 KAHRAMAA REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall attend to and afford all facilities to the KAHRAMAA and shall provide oil drainage pits, terminal
cable pits, terminal boxes for cables, underground ducts, etc. to facilitate all main feeder work.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for foreseeing any requirement as requested by the above mentioned authorities,
and shall follow the Engineer's instructions on Site.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing any workshop drawings concerning transformer rooms, electrical
(meter) rooms, feed-in routings, and shall consult the electrical authorities in accordance with the Engineer's
instructions, to seek the approval of these authorities.

D. The Contractor shall also be responsible for follow up of the application for electrical connection. The application form
shall be filled in by the Contractor who shall follow up with the concerned authorities for final electrical connection to
the project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIAL

A. All electrical materials and equipment to be used for the project shall be new and shall be manufactured by one of the
manufacturer listed in acceptable manufacturers’ list in relevant section.

B. Materials proposed to be used shall fulfill the requirement like Local availability of spare parts and Local technical
support with factory trained technicians.

2.2 DISCONNECTING SWITCHES

A. The switches shall be non-fusible single throw, number of poles and rating as shown on the Drawings.

B. Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break type, capable of making, carrying and interrupting specified current at its
rated voltage.

C. Switches rated more than 200 amps when used with motors shall be plainly marked "Do Not Operate under Load".

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 19 - Page 1 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

D. Switches rated 200 amps or less, when used with motors shall be motor circuit switch type, of horse-power rating
equal to, or more than, that of the associated motor and having interrupting capacity at least equal to the maximum
operating overload current of the motor at rated voltage.

E. Motor circuit switches shall incorporate all necessary auxiliary contacts to isolate auxiliary power supplied (if any)
associated with the starter.

F. Isolating switches with no interrupting ratings shall not be used, for any type and rating of motor.

G. Enclosures shall be treated with a rust-inhibiting phosphate, and finished in gray baked enamel.

2.3 ELECTRIC MOTORS

A. Motors shall be suitable for operation on a 220 - 240 Volt single phase or 380-415 Volt 3-phase, 3-Wire, 50Hz System
as shown on the Drawings and shall be dirt proof fan cooled induction motor type unless otherwise indicated or
specified. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15.

B. Motors of ratings smaller than 1 HP shall be single phase and those of rating 1 HP and above shall be three phase.

C. Motors of rating larger than 11 Kw shall be star-delta starting type, unless otherwise permitted or required by the Local
Authorities.

D. Motors of rating 11kw and smaller shall be direct on line starting type.

E. Every motor shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the driven equipment under all load and operating conditions
without exceeding its rated name-plate current or power or its specified temperature limit.

F. The horsepower ratings for motors shown on the Drawings must be considered as an indication only. For the use of
motors other than that specified, The Contractor shall assume the cost of and responsibility for, satisfactorily
accomplishing all changes (Including engineering costs of redesign by the Engineer) in the work as indicated and
specified. All derating resulting from site conditions shall be allowed for the design.

G. Motor performances shall comply with the requirements of IEC 34-1.

H. All motors shall be of a type approved for starting characteristics and ruggedness as may be required under the actual
conditions of operation.

I. The motors shall be designed so that the maximum temperature rise at continuous run under full load and operation
conditions shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards.

J. Motor windings shall be braced to withstand successfully the stresses resulting from the method of starting. The
windings shall be treated thoroughly with approved insulating compound suitable for protection against moisture and
slightly acidic or alkaline conditions.

K. Bearing shall be of the self-lubricating type designed to ensure proper alignment of motor and shaft and to prevent
leakage of lubricant.

L. Bearings for open motors shall be of the sleeve or ball type, as specified under the respective items of mechanical
equipment.

M. Vertical motors shall be provided with thrust bearings adequate for all thrusts to which they can be subjected in
operation.

N. Indoor motors located in relatively clean surrounding, free from any abrasive or conducting dust or chemical fumes,
shall be enclosed ventilated drip proof type. Otherwise motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type and Class F
insulation.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 19 - Page 2 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

O. Vertical motors if any shall be provided with thrust bearings adequate for all thrusts to which they can be subjected in
operation.

P. Vertical motors of open type shall be provided with drip hoods of approved shape and construction. When the drip
hood is too heavy to be easily removed provision shall be made for access for testing.

Q. Motors shall be furnished with oversize conduit terminal boxes to provide for making and housing the connections and
with flexible leads of sufficient length to extend for a distance of not less than 10cm. beyond the face of the box. The
size of cable terminals and conduit terminal box holes shall be as approved by the Engineer. An approved type of solder
less lug shall be supplied. Totally enclosed motors shall have cast-iron terminal boxes.

R. Motor shop test shall be made in accordance with AIEE Test Code as specified in the ANSI C50 for Rotating Electrical
Machinery or approved equal. NEMA Report-or-test forms shall be used in submitting test data.

S. Complete tests of each motor supplied shall be made and certified test data sheets shall be submitted, unless witness
shop tests are required by the Detail Specifications pertaining to the equipment. Each motor shall be tested for
efficiency and power factor at 50, 75 and 100 percent of its rated horsepower, for temperature rise, torque, starting
current and dielectric strength and for compliance with all specified performance requirements.

2.4 STARTER AND CONTROL PANEL

A. Starters located indoors shall have IP 42 sheet steel enclosures. Starters located outdoors or in damp areas shall have IP
55 weather resistant enclosures.

B. Enclosures shall be finished in light blue/grey (RAL 7032) epoxy powder coating.

C. Panel or door mounted control devices shall be oil tight type. Separately mounted control devices shall be heavy duty
cast type or IP42 sheet steel enclosures for indoor use and IP55 in damp areas.

D. Stop buttons located at motors shall be lock-out type with provision for padlocking.

E. Starters and control devices located in finished areas shall be flush-mounted.

F. Starters shall be equipped with one manual reset thermal overload relay in each ungrounded conductor. Starter shall
have utilization category of AC-3.

G. Starters shall be automatic air break type as specified or as shown on the drawings.

H. Magnetic starters shall include main contractor, fused 240 V control transformer, auxiliary contacts, door switches, and
cover mounted control devices as shown on the drawings.

I. Magnetic starters shall include main contractor, fused 240 V control transformer and cover mounted hand-off-auto
switch and red "run" indicating light.

J. Combination starters shall include a moulded case circuit breaker as described in the article on disconnect switches
with an interrupting capacity of 35kA for 3 second RMS symmetrical.

K. Starters for three phase motors shall have maximum starting current characteristics of five to six times full load current.

L. Where an external control voltage is present in a starter, provide a warning nameplate and barriers or a door disconnect
auxiliary switch to interrupt the control circuit.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 19 - Page 3 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

2.5 NAMEPLATES

A. Nameplates in Arabic and English shall be installed on all devices or pieces of equipment for which the use or
identification may not be readily apparent, such as, but not limited to, starters, relays, contactors, controls,
pushbuttons, indicating lights, switches.

B. Nameplates shall be made of laminated sheet plastic, 2.5 mm thick, or of anodized aluminum, approximately 1.5 mm
thick, engraved to provide black letters on a white background, and fastened in place with corrosion-resistant
screws, or as specified by local authorities. Name plates for IP55 panels shall be fixed with adhesives.

C. Nameplates shall also be provided on all manufactured assemblies to identify the assembly as well as feeders, circuits,
compartments, switches, internal components, etc.

D. Nameplates shall be located in a position to be easily readable after completion of the installation of the equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall supply all necessary labor and material, and shall install, complete and make ready for use, the
above mentioned systems including the installation and wiring of miscellaneous equipment and devices, as indicated on
the drawings and as herein specified.

B. The Contractor shall carry out the whole of the Electrical works in a workman like and substantial manner and in strict
conformance with the codes, Standards and requirements listed in the following clauses, or approved equal.

C. All equipment and material supplied for this project shall be manufactured in strict compliance with the standards listed
in the following clauses or acceptable equal.

D. If actual ratings of equipment supplied under other sections are different than the values indicated on the Drawings, the
Contractor shall implement all necessary modifications at no extra cost, to the acceptable of the Engineer and as
approved relevant Local Authorities.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF MOTORS AND STARTER PANELS

A. Select overload relays according to code and the recommendations of the manufacturer, based on motor nameplate full
load current.

B. Select overload relays with characteristics to permit accelerating the load to full speed without tripping.

C. Mount groups of starters and control equipment on Dixon angle structures, complete with splitters, wiring trough and
all required fittings.

D. Operate reduced voltage, star-delta and part winding starters to ensure that the timing sequence and operation are
correct, before energizing motors.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 19 - Page 4 of 5
 SECTION 26 24 19
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

3.3 INSTALLATION OF DISCONNECTING SWITCHES

A. Provide disconnect switches local to all motors, starters and electrical equipment where required to meet Code
regulations and jurisdictional authorities, whether supplied or installed under the electrical Division or any other
Division.

3.4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

A. The Contractor shall test and commission the works to the approval of the Engineer.

B. The Electrical works shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with the Chartered Institution of Building
Services commissioning codes.

C. The Contractor shall include for the provision of all chemicals and other consumables required for testing,
commissioning and setting to work of each section of the Works.

D. The Contractor shall prepare a list of these consumables giving quantities necessary for each section of the works and
the recommended suppliers.

E. The Contractor shall use an approved independent specialist commissioning engineer for the capital plant and
equipment, under no circumstances the Contractor shall use his own staff for such things.

F. The Contractor shall submit the Engineer for approval, a detailed method statement for each testing and commissioning
activity.

G. The Engineer shall be notified seven calendar days or more in advance when any test is to take place, and it shall not be
started without his permission.

H. The Contractor shall ensure that he gives the Engineer at least two (2) working days written notice of any tests
requiring witnessing.

I. The Contractor shall maintain written records of all tests. Successful test records shall be counter signed by the
Engineer and bound into the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3.5 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical equipment shall be protected against mechanical damage and from the weather especially from water
dripping or splashing upon it, at all times during shipment, storage, and construction.

B. Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Where equipment is installed or stored in moist areas, such as unheated
buildings, open spaces, etc., it shall be provided with an acceptable means to prevent the moisture damage. This may be
uniformly distributed source of heat to prevent condensation.

C. Should any equipment or material be subjected to possible damage by water, it shall be dried out thoroughly and put
through a special dielectric test as directed by engineer, at the expense of the Contractor or shall be replaced by the
Contractor without any additional charge.

D. Should any equipment or material be subjected to possible mechanical damage, the Contractor shall repair or replace
the damaged equipment as instructed by the Engineer.

3.6 Manufacturers: Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 262419

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 24 19 - Page 5 of 5
 SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

SECTION 262726

WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. The Contractor shall supply and install all of the wiring devices as indicated on the Drawings and as herein specified.

B. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete performance of
all switches, socket outlets etc... in accordance with the specifications and drawings.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Specification for ceiling roses - BS 67: 1987.

B. Specification for 13A fused plug and socket outlets - BS 1363:1984

C. Specification for Moulding materials - BS 1323:1992

D. Specification for Transformers for reduced voltage - BS 3535:1990

E. Specification for Lighting Switches - BS 3676

F. Specification Two pole and earthing-pin plugs,socket-outlets and socket- outlet adapters -BS 546

G. Cooker Control Units rated 30 Amp. and 45 Amp. 250 volts single phase supply -BS 4177

H. Industrial Plugs, Socket Outlets and Couplers -BS 4343

I. Boxes for enclosure of electrical Accessories -BS 4662

J. Fuse Switches and Switch Fuses -BS 5419

K. General requirements for electrical accessories -BS 5733

L. General requirements for luminaire supporting couplers -BS 6972

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 27 26 - Page 1 of 6
 SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Conduits and fittings shall be distinctively marked as manufactured for electrical purposes.

C. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DEVICE PLATES

A. Plates shall be rectangular or square in shape and designed to match associated devices to the acceptance of the
Engineer.

B. Plates for cord extension shall be provided with cord grip bushings, threaded type, of same material and finish as of
plate.

C. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, plates for flush mounting devices shall be constructed of
moulded material of ivory or white in color in general areas.

D. Fixing screws shall be chromium plated and polished. Screw heads shall be finished to suit the plates.

2.2 SWITCHES

A. Switches shall be rocker operated mounted with the operating handle in the upward position when in the "ON" position
unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

B. Switches shall interrupt the hot wire or hot and neutral simultaneously as applicable.

C. Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break, with silver alloy contacts and spring assembly lubricated for the life of the
switch neoprene bumpers.

D. Switches shall be 250 Volt AC only rated with number of poles and minimum 20A amp ratings to BS 3676.

E. Lighting switches to be rated 10, 15 or 20 amps depending on connected load as mentioned in the QGEWC regulations.

F. Switches shall be one gang or multi-gang, 1-way, 2-way or intermediate as indicated on the drawings and to the
acceptance of the Engineer.

G. 20 Amp or 32 Amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light, and shall incorporate the plate indicating the
purpose of its use.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 27 26 - Page 2 of 6
 SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

H. 45/50 Amp double pole switches shall incorporate a pilot light, and shall incorporate the plate indicating the purpose of
its use.

I. For double pole switches the face plate shall be of matt chrome, unless specified in the project, documentation shall be
engraved “ WATER HEATER” etc. as required.

J. All switches in Plant rooms, Electrical Service rooms, Technical rooms and wet areas shall be weather proof (IP-56)
with Metal clad finishes.

2.3 SWITCH PANELS

A. Switch panels shall be of the grid switch system, comprising rocker-operated grid switches and cover plates of ploy-
carbonate material or metallic otherwise indicated in the project documentation.

B. Switch panels shall comprise 20-amp lighting switches, and other units if so indicated on the Drawings to the
acceptance of the Engineer.

C. Switch panels shall have the words “Danger 415 volts" engraved in red in it.

2.4 LIGHTING CONTACTOR CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS

A. Pushbuttons shall be double contact type with spring return action.

B. Body shall be made of molded plastic with clear baked acrylic protection.

2.5 SOCKET OUTLETS

A. General purpose Socket outlets shall be of the standard, 3 rectangular pin (2P+E) rated 13A 250V, switched, single
phase, shuttered type of poly-carbonate unless otherwise specified.

B. 13 Amp socket outlets shall be flat pin type, to BS 1363, single or twin as indicated to the acceptance of the Engineer.

C. 15 Amp socket shall be round pin switched type to BS 546.

D. 15 Amp socket shall be round pin type to the acceptance of the Engineer and shall be provided with corresponding
plugs to the acceptance of the Engineer.

E. 30 Amp sockets shall be round pin type, cover made of brass, and shall be provided with corresponding plugs to
the acceptance of the Engineer.

F. All sockets in Plant rooms / Electrical Service rooms shall be weather proof (min. IP-55) with Metal clad finishes.

2.6 PROTECTIVE SOCKET COVER

A. Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with protective socket covers.

B. Protective socket cover shall be manufactured from high impact resistant "Noryl". The cover shall be designed to fall
by gravity over the socket whether a plug is inserted or not.

2.7 CEILING ROSES

A. Ceiling roses shall be shall be moulded in a non-track insulating material to BS 1323 and shall comply with BS 67 and
IEE Wiring Regulations with a white finish.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 27 26 - Page 3 of 6
 SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

B. Ceiling roses shall incorporate 3 terminals (one of which properly shrouded), loop-in, earth and strain. The shrouded
terminal shall be used for the live un-switched wires.

C. 3 Pin ceiling roses shall include plug and socket interface and shall comply BS 6972 and BS 5733.

2.8 HOOK FOR CHANDELIER

A. Hook shall be suitable for suspension of chandeliers of up to 25 KGS, unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 FUSED CONNECTION UNIT

A. Fused connection unit shall be surface mounting type or flush type as indicated and as applicable.

B. The 13 Amp fused connection unit shall incorporate a double pole switch, a neon indicator and a fuse link to BS 1362
of appropriate rating.

2.10 FLOOR BOXES

A. Floor service boxes shall be 2 compartment type of the size 300x300mm and shall be constructed from high pressure
Zinc Alloy die casting base frame pillars. This shall be fixed on to heavy gauge galvanized steel base plate for support
by support frame. Other materials adequate in strength and performance shall be used and these shall be protected
against corrosion. The boxes shall be constructed with provisions for ducting or conduit access on all four sides.
Unwanted entries shall be blanked off with detachable side blanks.

B. Cover for floor service boxes shall be made of high pressure zinc alloy die casting provided with suitable hinges
designed to enable the trap cover to open through 180 degrees and giving access at all times to the power and telephone
outlets.

C. Covers shall have 12mm recess to receive ceramic tiles or carpet tiles. Counter sunk screws shall secure the covers of
boxes. All exposed portions shall be epoxy coated in grey color.

D. All boxes shall have extra wide gaskets in order to minimize water seepage. Gaskets shall be made of material durable
to withstand loads. Boxes shall be adjustable in height to match with the floor thickness.

E. Adequate segregation shall be provided between service runs within boxes by using cross-over bridges and rigid
compartments. Circuit protective conductors shall be provided between covers and boxes. Cable emerging shall be
protected against damage by means of nylon cables exit grommets or equivalent and shall be reversible to close
position when not in use.

2.11 TELEPHONE OUTLETS

A. The contractor The Contractor shall supply and install telephone points and the associated mains power outlets which
shall conform to BS1363.

B. The telephone outlets shall be jack type and from the same manufacturer, and finish as for the lighting and general
power outlets, unless specified otherwise.

C. Telephone outlets shall be of the type approved by OOREDOO

2.12 TV OUTLETS

A. TV outlets shall be of molded material and shall have a low attenuation (1 db) for all frequencies.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 27 26 - Page 4 of 6
 SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

B. TV outlets shall be with three outlets SAT/TV/FM and supplied with matching plugs and cord of 1.2 meters.

C. TV outlets shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the TV System and to the acceptance of the Engineer.

2.13 CONTROL PANELS

A. Control stations shall be spring type, with silver plated contacts. Contacts shall be 5 amp rated. Plate shall be
constructed from aluminum gray baked enamel painted.

B. ON-OFF maintained contact station shall have two pushbuttons, one green for ON and one red for OFF.

C. A green pilot light shall be incorporated which shall lit when pushbutton ON is depressed and the words ON & OFF
shall be engraved on the pushbuttons in white.

D. START-STOP momentary contact type station shall have two pushbuttons, one green for START and one red for
STOP.

E. A green pilot light shall be incorporated which shall lit when pushbutton START is depressed and the word START &
STOP shall be engraved on all motor control stations.

F. UP-STOP-DOWN momentary contact type stations shall have three pushbuttons and no pilot lights.

G. Pushbuttons shall be moulded from trac-resistant material, and shall be provided with button shrouding ring.

H. Key switch shall be a cylinder lock operator type station with three positions UP-OFF-DOWN and these words shall be
engraved on the station.

I. Stations in damp & wet locations shall be enclosed in a Feraloy box and covered with stainless steel plates to IP67.

2.14 FLEX-OUTLET

A. Flex-outlet shall be as indicated on the Drawings, to the acceptance of the Engineer.

2.15 CABLE OUTLET

A. Cable outlet shall comprise a poly-carbonate cover plate with a side groove for 3 x 10 mm2 multi-core flexible
cord, a cable clamp, 3 terminals for 10 mm2 conductors.

2.16 LIGHTING CONTACTOR

A. Lighting contactor shall have totally enclosed silver alloy double break power contacts capable of continuously
carrying, making and breaking any load within the rating of the contactor without the assistance of auxiliary
arcing contacts. Auxiliary arcing contacts are not acceptable. All contacts shall be removable without disturbing
line or load wiring.

B. Lighting contactors shall be electrically held type, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

C. Lighting contactors with time delay service shall have an adjustable time delay relay ranging from 60 to 300 seconds.

D. Lighting contactors mounted individually shall be provided in dust proof enclosures, and those mounted in control
panels shall be suitable for the purpose.

2.17 RELAY FOR REMOTE LIGHTING SWITCHING CONTROL

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 27 26 - Page 5 of 6
 SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING ACCESSORIES AND GENERAL POWER

A. The relay shall have a low voltage Split Coil - One half for ON, one half for off, Operating voltage - nominal 24 VAC,
a pilot light switch, The time to activate - 50 milliseconds at 24 V rectified AC, single pole, single throw maintained
contacts, Back wired terminals, screw clamp type.

2.18 CONTROL PUSH BUTTON FOR LIGHTING RELAY

A. Control pushbutton shall consist of a momentary (single pole double throw) contact, normally open.

B. The pushbutton shall be complete with pilot switch and stainless steel wall plate.

2.19 TRANSFORMER FOR REMOTE CONTROL LIGHTING RELAY

A. Transformer shall consist of a service voltage and frequency primary, 75 VA momentary and 40 VA continuous
loading capacity for 24 Volts system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHES AND SOCKETS

A. Wiring devices shall be flush mounted type, unless otherwise noted and shall be installed at heights as shown on
the Drawing, or as directed by the Engineer.

B. Wiring devices fixed on glazed tiles shall include a rubber gasket between the cover plate and the glazed tiles for rigid
fixing of the device plates. The gaskets shall not protrude beyond the plate: they shall be neatly cut in the shape of the
plate.

C. Socket outlets shall be mounted with correct polarity, such that switch shall cut the hot wire.

D. All lighting fixtures incorporated in a false ceiling shall be connected to the ceiling lighting outlet through a
ceiling rose and a flexible cord.

E. The un-switched and fused connection type units shall be used for security system components.

F. Outlet for fan coil units with heaters ceiling mounted shall be surface mounting type and shall comprise a 20-amp
double pole switch for the fan motor and a 50-amp double pole switch for the heater.

G. Outlet for fan coil units installed at low level shall be a recess mounting 13-amp fused connection unit incorporating a
double pole switch, neon indicator, fuse of appropriate rating and flex outlet.

H. Outlet for fan coil units with heaters installed at low level shall be a recess mounting 25-amp twin double pole switch
with two flex outlets or alternatively a 20-amp and a 50-amp two double pole switches with two flex outlets.

3.2 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 262726

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 27 26 - Page 6 of 6
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

SECTION 263213

STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

PART 1 - GENERAL

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

SCOPE OF WORKS

C. Contractor shall submit certificate of manufacturer's inspection of the crankshaft, including statement of inspection
method.

D. The Contractor should include the proper size rigid exhaust galvanized pipe and its connection to the flexible bellows,
Mineral wool Insulation and aluminum cladding to the exhaust system, Wiring from the control transformer to the
dampers (where required), Ductwork for the cooling system, Main fuel tank, daily fuel storage tank, fuel transfer
pumps and all piping to the engine.

E. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

F. The following diesel engine standards are referenced in this specification:

1. BS 5514 Part 1 (ISO 3046/1-1981) Diesel Engines

2. BS 5514 Part 2 (ISO 3046/1-1977) Diesel Engines

G. The generating set shall conform in design, materials and performance with all applicable codes and regulations and the
current edition of the following standards.

1. IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

2. BS 4999 Rotating Electrical Machines
3. BS 5000 Rotating Electrical Machines
4. BS 800 Limits for Radio Interference

MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

H. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

I. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 1 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

J. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

K. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

L. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

M. The Contractor shall supply, install, commission, test and handover in good operable manner including 400 days
guarantee and maintenance of 415 V mains failure, standby diesel generator set and 5 years guarantee for electric
motors, as per the Project Documentation

N. The D/G sub-contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory operation of the D/G installation during the
Maintenance and Guarantee Period. He shall carry out necessary inspection, preventive maintenance and testing to keep
the set ready all the time. The set shall function satisfactorily during power failures. The D/G sub-contractor shall carry
out routine testing of the installation once in every month throughout the Maintenance and Guarantee Period. The
testing shall be carried in presence of Engineer.

GENERATOR SET

O. The generator set shall include, Diesel Engine, AC generator with excitation and control system and surge suppression
equipment, CT's and VT's for AVR Control, Integral Day Fuel Tank, Rigid skid and Four lift points for single crane
lift.

P. The generator set shall include also Spreader beams if required, Oil spillage tray with drainage plug, Topside structure
to be solid steel plate, Fuel Transfer Pumps and Local engine panel incorporating engine gauge board and alarms.

Q. The generator set shall include Engine starting batteries and chargers, Driver suitable flexible couplings and all
fasteners/nuts/bolts

R. The generator set shall be provided with complete system and piping harness for cooling/flushing/draining/lubrication
etc.

S. The generator set rating shall be as indicated on drawing with speed of 1500 RPM, Voltage of 415 volt three phase &
neutral (TP/N) 4 wire and Frequency of 50 Hz

T. The standby rating shall be based on 8 hours service at 50 degree C ambient temperature and 95% relative humidity, at
an elevation of 10m above sea level.

U. The rating shall be the net output after deducting the operating power requirements of all fans, pumps and other engine-
driven auxiliaries.

OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS

V. The set shall be capable of coming up to speed and voltage, and shall be able to take over the emergency load within 10
seconds of the closing of the engine starting contacts.

W. The full-load frequency regulation shall not exceed 3 Hz for gradually applied loads and 6 Hz for suddenly applied or
removed loads.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 2 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

X. The steady state full load voltage regulation shall not exceed 1.5%.

Y. The instantaneous voltage dip shall not exceed 15% of rated voltage when full 3 phase load at rated power factor is
applied to the alternator, with a recovery time of less than 10 seconds to the limit for steady state voltage regulation and
remaining constant within plus or minus 1%.

Z. The engine shall shut down automatically in case of high coolant temperature, low lubricating oil pressure, over speed
or over cranking.

AA. The generator must be capable of withstanding, without damage, 150% of current rate output for 60 seconds with
minimum deviation of rated voltage.

BB. The generator shall be capable of withstanding, without damage, a three phase, line to line, line to earth or two line to
earth, short circuit condition for a period of three seconds when operating at the rated speed, and excitation equal to 5%
over voltage at no load.

CC. The generator shall be capable of operating continuously at full load on an unbalanced system with negative sequence
currents up to 8% of phase currents, with none of the phase currents exceeding the rated current.

DD. High generator and exciter shall withstand an over speed of at least 20% above the rated speed for two minutes without
mechanical damage or permanent distortion.

EE. Generator reactance and excitation equipment are to be selected to satisfy the sudden load application and voltage drop
requirements as specified on data sheet.

FF. The generator shall be of the salient pole rotating field type with enclosure to IP 21 and air cooled by means of fans on
the rotor shaft.

GG. The stator windings are to be star connected with all six winding ends to be brought out.

HH. The alphabetical sequences of the line connected are to correspond to the item sequence of the phases at the required
direction of rotation winding end markings like Line as UVW and star points as XYZ

II. Insulation shall be class F with Class B temperature rise, after taking account of the maximum site ambient
temperature.

JJ. Generator bearings are shall be provided with Earth link on drive end bearing and Bearings insulated from frame

KK. Generator protection current transformers shall be located within the generator terminal boxes and not at the
switchgear.

EXCITATION

LL. The excitation system shall comprise a rotating main AC exciter, pilot exciter and automatic voltage regulator.

MM. The rotating main and pilot exciters are to be of the brushless type with the rotating rectifier assembly being carried on
the main exciter.

NN. The enclosure, cooling system and insulation for the exciter are to be similar to the main generator covered above.

OO. The AVR is to be of the static type to maintain the voltage to within plus or minus 1% of the set voltage at any load
from no load to full load, at power factor 0.8 to 1, with machine cold or warm at a speed drop of approximately 3% of
the nominal speed and have a selectable characteristic for reactive load sharing. The voltage level is to be adjustable
within plus or minus 5%.

PP. Voltage regulation shall be at Steady state conditions: Grade 3.11 (VR3) as per BS 4999 Pt 140 and at Transient
conditions: Grade 2.32 (VR2.32) as per BS 4999 Pt 140
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 3 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

QQ. The exciter shall be provided with short circuit support equipment to maintain three times the rated current for three
seconds to ensure proper fault clearance in outgoing feeders.

DIESEL ENGINE

RR. The diesel engine shall be turbo charged.

SS. The steel base frame shall be provided with spring type vibration isolators. The engine shall be able to
deliver full load in the shortest possible time after start. The engine speed shall not exceed 1500 r.p.m.

TT. The diesel engine continuous power and bare engine output shall be rated in accordance with the specification and
BS5514 Part 1.

UU. The diesel engine shall be guaranteed to deliver the rated output at the rated speed for specific type of service and site
conditions with no negative tolerance. The actual engine fuel heat rate shall not exceed guaranteed heat rate by more
than 4%.

VIBRATION AND CRITICAL SPEEDS

VV. Torsional natural frequencies of the engine drive system, including couplings and driven equipment, should be avoided
within 10% of any shaft speed in the rotating system.

WW. Anti-vibration mounts shall be provided between equipment and skid. All piping connections to engine, except the
exhaust, shall be via steel braided flexible hoses.

FUEL SYSTEM AND MUFFLER

XX. The fuel system shall include, Air cleaner with reusable cleanable dry element, Engine-mounted gear type fuel transfer
pump, suitable for minimum 1800mm lift, Fuel filters, Manual fuel priming pump, for use after maintenance work on
the fuel system, Flexible connections to fuel pump and injectors.

YY. Fuel tank shall be supplied and installed with all necessary pipes, supports for fuel storage of 12 hours standby
operation of the generator set.

ZZ. The tank shall be constructed with stainless steel of grade 304. It shall be complete with filler cap, contents gauge, level
indicator, overflow pipe, vent pipe and sludge valve.

AAA. Pipes from tank to diesel engine shall be run with necessary mechanical protection and proper safety pre-cautions.

BBB. The exhaust muffler shall be residential type, designed to meet all applicable noise and emission standards, and shall
include 500mm flexible bellows with standard pipe flanges.

CCC. Ensure that the bellows is suitable for 30mm lateral and 30mm longitudinal movement due to expansion and
contraction of the exhaust piping.

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

DDD. The lubrication system shall include Force feed type gear pump, providing positive full pressure lubrication to all
bearings and gears, Pressure relief valve, Full flow oil filter with replaceable element and spring loaded bypass valve,
Oil level indicator, Oil cooler with viscosity level bypass to maintain stable oil temperature, Priority lubrication system
to turbocharger bearings, on turbocharged engines.

EEE. The oil sump shall be readily accessible for cleaning and the drain plug shall be located to permit convenient and
complete draining.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 4 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

FFF. Pre-priming of lubricating oil shall not be required before starting the engine.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

GGG. The engine shall be water cooled by an engine driven fan cooled radiator.

HHH. The cooling system shall provide automatic control of the engine inlet water temperature. Thermostatically controlled
bypass valves shall be arranged so that cooling water flow cannot be shut-off.

III. The cooling system shall be provided with connections for filling the system, checking coolant level, and adding make-
up water when necessary. The system shall be such as to allow for complete drainage of the engine and all ancillary
equipment and for complete venting.

JJJ. Radiators shall be sized to achieve stable conditions at the rated output with the worst ambient conditions specified and
the fouling factor shall be 0.0004 w/m2C on the water side

KKK. Cooling water shall be inhibited for corrosion protection.

LLL. The fan shall be capable of 125Pa static pressure for ducts and louvers.

BATTERIES AND CHARGER

MMM. The engine shall be started automatically by a 12 volt or 24 volt starting system, including positive engagement
starting motor, solenoid switch, batteries and charger.

NNN. Batteries shall be nickel-cadmium type, mounted in a suitable rack on the engine base, and sized to provide 5
consecutive cranking intervals of 10 seconds duration each, separated by 15 second rest periods, without recharging, at
an ambient temperature of 100C. The voltage level after the last interval shall be adequate to maintain performance of
all DC relays and timers in the control system.

OOO. The battery charger shall be automatic constant voltage static type providing float and equalizing charge rates, with
manual control and terminating timer on the equalizing charge.

PPP. The timer on the equalizing charge shall be adjustable from 16 to 24 hours.

QQQ. The charger shall include a voltmeter, charge rate ammeter, float- equalize switch, on-off switch and pilot light.

RRR. The charger shall be capable of recharging the batteries fully within 2 hours after the 5 consecutive cranking intervals.

SSS. When the engine is running, the batteries shall be charged from an engine-mounted charging system including
alternator, rectification and relays.

AUTOMATIC STARTING FACILITY

TTT. Automatic mode: Following a loss of normal mains supply, the emergency diesel generator unit should start
automatically, on receiving a signal from the mains monitoring relays brought to rated speed and voltage. All
accessories required for starting and completion of sequence of operation for the above purpose shall be provided.

UUU. Immediately after the generator set reached rated speed and rated voltage, voltage and frequency monitoring relays
located in control panel shall extend an impulse for closing generator breaker.

VVV. Manual start in service mode: This shall be effective in manual position of auto/manual switch and service position of
service/test selector switch located in control panel. The scheme of operation shall be same as of auto mode as per (a)
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 5 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

above except that starting impulse shall be extended manually through the push button either in local control panel or
purchaser's control panel.

WWW. Manual test mode: This shall be effective in test position of service/test selector switch. The scheme of operation
shall be same as that of manual start in service mode, except that the closing impulse for generator breaker shall not be
extended automatically.

CONTROL PANELS

XXX. Control panels shall be dead front, front access, (IP45) enclosed, rust proofed, and finished in powder coated protective
corrosion resistant finish light grey. The front of the main panel shall be hinged.

YYY. The engine control panel shall be shock-mounted on the engine or base and shall include indicator alarm and trip
conditions for all requirement

ZZZ. The supplier shall provide all alarms and trip circuits in addition to the switch inputs.

AAAA. The control panel shall be integral part of the generator set, and shall include :

1. AC ammeter with phase selector switch.

2. AC voltmeter with phase selector switch.
3. Frequency meter, reed or dial type.
4. Voltage adjusting rheostat, with minimum range of plus or minus 5%.
5. Main circuit breaker, molded case type, with long-time only trips to protect against short circuits lasting 10
seconds and thermal overload and short circuit conditions. (May be mounted in separate enclosure on side of
engine).
6. Auxiliary circuit breaker for power to damper motors (if required).
7. Kilowatt (kW) meter.
8. Run-stop-auto switch, heavy-duty oil-tight type, with contacts arranged so that transfer switch does not operate
when testing engine, except as required by failure of normal source.
9. Lamp type annunciator, with individual signals for each cause of emergency shutdown i.e. low oil pressure, over
speed, high engine temperatures, etc.
10. Cranking limiter.
11. Terminal blocks for remote wiring.
12. All necessary equipment, devices and wiring for operation of the set.

BBBB. Meters and controls shall be flush mounted on the front of the panel. Other equipment shall be readily accessible
behind the hinged front panel.

CCCC. All equipment on or in the panel shall be identified by lamicoid nameplates with white letters on a black background.

DDDD. All control and alarm wiring extending beyond the panel and all points required for maintenance or testing shall be
brought to identified terminal blocks. Wires shall be identified by cable markers at each point of connection or
termination.

EEEE. All switches shall be load-break, heavy duty type. All fuses shall be non-deteriorating HRC cartridge pressure fitted,
link type. The contractors shall be of air-break type having AC-3 duty rating. Thermal overload relays shall be three
element, positive acting, and ambient temperature compensated type with adjustable setting range and built-in
protection feature against single phasing.

FFFF. All indicating instruments shall be moving iron, flush mounting type and of 72mm x 72mm square pattern. All
control/selector switches shall be rotary back connected type having a com-operated contact mechanism with knob type
handle. 'Stop' push buttons shall be stay put type.

GGGG. Wiring for power, control and signalling circuits shall be done with PVC insulated copper conductors having
660/1000 V grade insulation. Minimum size of control wires shall be 2.5mm2.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 6 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

HHHH. An adequately sized earth bus shall be provided in the panel for connection to the main earth grid. All non-current
carrying metallic parts of the mounted equipments shall be earthed. Doors and movable parts shall be earthed using
flexible copper connections.

GOVERNOR

IIII. The engine speed shall be maintained automatically by an electronic isochronous governor with venire adjustment.

JJJJ. Fuel pumps shall be restricted to prevent delivery of more fuel than the engine can accept without overloading.

KKKK. The governor shall be suitable for maintaining the frequency within specified limits (BS 5514 class A type).

TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES

LLLL. Vibration isolators shall be spring type, which transmit a maximum of 1% of engine vibrations to the floor and
quantities shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the set.

MMMM. Provide a drip pan under the engine.

NNNN. Provide a transformer for damper controls and connect to the auxiliary breaker in the control panel (where required).

OOOO. Provide a complete set of any special tools required for the proper operation, maintenance and adjustment of the
equipment.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. The emergency standby power system shall be a complete operating engine-alternator set, capable of functioning fully
automatically and supplying power to essential loads during outages.

B. The set shall be an integral unit mounted on a rigid steel base.

C. All fuses and other replaceable components shall be readily accessible for replacement or maintenance.

D. Mount the base on vibration isolators, except where the engine is shock-mounted to the skid.

E. Provide adequate guards on the exhaust manifold, fan and other parts of the equipment for the protection of operating
personnel. Guards shall be readily removable and shall not obstruct normal maintenance operations.

F. Make all electrical connections between the engine, alternator and associated equipment.

G. Mount the muffler so that it’s weight is not supported by the engine.

H. Provide exhaust piping up to and including the flexible connection on the outlet side of the muffler.

I. After installation, carry out further tests under the supervision of a qualified representative of the manufacturer, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct operation and maintenance procedures for the
set.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 7 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

TESTING AND VERIFICATION

J. Carry out complete tests in the manufacturer's plant, in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer fourteen days
in advance.

K. The Contractor shall pay the executive travelling, lodging and food expenses for the Engineer’s inspection at the
manufacturer plant.

L. Carry out tests with a controllable and adjustable load bank, capable of providing a steady load, free from fluctuations,
at 1.0 power factor.

M. The test procedure shall be as follows:

1. Start the set. Adjust the voltage and frequency to the related values and apply the load.
2. Maintain full load on the set until the coolant temperature stabilizes, and in any case for a period of not less than
six (6) hours.
3. Read and record the following data at the beginning of the test and each half hour thereafter : frequency or
speed, voltage and current in all phases, load, coolant temperature, ambient temperature at engine block level,
lubricating oil temperature, lubricating oil pressure and fuel consumption
4. Do not adjust voltage or frequency during the test. Adjust the load bank as required to maintain full load on the
set.

N. At the end of the run, increase the load to 110% of rated for 1 hour, and takes the above readings every 15 minutes.

O. Apply full three phase load at unity power factor to the set. The voltage drop shall not exceed 12%, and the unit shall
return to stable operation within three (3) seconds, with the terminal voltage within the limit for steady state voltage
regulation and remaining constant within plus or minus 1%.

P. Demonstrate high coolant temperature shutdown by blocking the air circulation through the radiator.

Q. Demonstrate low oil pressure shutdown by closing a valve in the lubricating oil line to the pressure switch, without
interfering with engine lubrication.

R. Demonstrate over speed shutdown by operating the over speed contacts.

S. Perform a mechanical inspection of the set.

T. Install strip chart recorder to record frequency and voltage variations during load switching procedures. Delay each
load change until unit has reached steady state condition. Load switching is to be as follows: No load to full load, No
load to 20% load, No load to 50% load, No load to 75% load, 20% load to 50% load and 50% load to 75% load

U. After complete unit is installed on site, this Contractor shall arrange and pay for to repeat the same test as conducted at
the factory at a ambient temperature of 45 degree C and with a variable load bank.

V. In addition, demonstrate the following to the Engineer:

1. Startup, transfer of load to generator set; retransfer to normal source and shutdown on automatic control.
2. Startup and shutdown on Manual control.
3. Startup and shutdown on Test control.
4. Startup and shutdown on Engine Start control.
5. Correct operation on timing devices and safety shutdown devices.

W. The site test shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer and Owner representative.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 8 of 9
 SECTION 26 32 13
STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR SET

2.2 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 263213

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 32 13 - Page 9 of 9
 SECTION 26 33 23
EMERGENCY LIGHTING

SECTION 263323

EMERGENCY LIGHTING

1.GENERAL

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

SCOPE OF WORKS
D. Contractor shall submit certificate of manufacturer's inspection of the crankshaft, including statement of inspection
method.

E. The Contractor should include the proper size rigid exhaust galvanized pipe and its connection to the flexible bellows,
Mineral wool Insulation and aluminum cladding to the exhaust system, Wiring from the control transformer to the
dampers (where required), Ductwork for the cooling system, Main fuel tank, daily fuel storage tank, fuel transfer
pumps and all piping to the engine.

F. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

The following standards and documents of other organisations are referred to in this Part,
and shall be complied with:

BS 4533 .......... General requirements and tests

BS 4533........... Luminaires for emergency lighting
BS 5225 Method of photometric measurement of battery operated emergency lighting luminaires
BS 5266........... Emergency lighting
BS 7671 .......... Requirements for electrical Installations
BS EN 60529... Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
ISO 9000 ......... Quality management and assurance standards
QGEW C .......... Qatar General Electricity & W ater Corporation Regulations.

Quality Assurance
G. The supplier‟s manufacturing facility shall be certified to ISO 9000 or equivalent.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 23 - Page 1 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 23
EMERGENCY LIGHTING

WARRANTY
H. Battery units, luminaires and accessories shall be warranted for a minimum of 5 years by the manufacturer.

I. The battery shall have minimum 10 years useful life.

2.PRODUCTS

General
J. Emergency lighting installations shall be complete with emergency batteries, chargers, luminaires and wiring, all
as described in Specifications and as indicated on the Project Drawings, complying with BS 5266 Part 1.All emergency
lighting shall be Non-maintained type except for the EXIT lights where it shall be maintained unless otherwise
explicitly specified in the project documentation.

K. Non-maintained luminaires shall be supplied directly from the battery system. Maintained exit luminaires etc., shall be
supplied from a separate supply via an independent transformer and shall only operate from batteries during mains
failure.

L. The operation of the system shall be such that on loss of one or all phases of the main electricity supply, a set of
central batteries or individual battery packs shall provide power for

M. 3 hours to illuminate emergency luminaires throughout the building. On restoration of the mains supply the
batteries shall be charged by an integral charger such that the system supplies not less than 85 % of its rated voltage
after a period of 12 hours.

Central Battery Units

N. Battery chargers:
1. battery chargers shall be installed in purpose-made metallic enclosures with an index of protection IP 31 in
accordance with BS EN 60529 suitable for wall or floor mounting, depending on size
2. battery charger enclosures may house the system batteries providing the design of the enclosure ensures safe
operation with the batteries specified. This arrangement should normally be restricted to smaller systems
e.g. for circuit breaker tripping supplies for power supply to emergency lighting system, central battery units
shall be wall or floor mounted as required, conforming to BS 4533 Section 102.22, and be of
3. robust, high quality construction. Enclosures shall be metal, with hinged lockable doors and with suitable
ventilation provided
4. battery charger shall operate from a 415 V, three phase or 240 V, 50 Hz single phase supply, unless otherwise
specified
5. battery charger shall be rated to supply trickle charge and any standing loading plus any additional recharging
load that may be imposed
6. battery charger shall use an uncontrolled bridge as the input stage to minimise harmonic generation on
the supply system. The characteristics of each charger shall match the requirements of the specific batteries
selected and the duty cycle
7. battery charger shall be suitable for fully automatic charging of the appropriate battery and shall be
provided with:
a. Mains „ON‟ lamp
b. Main ON/OFF switch
c. Charge Ammeter Discharge Ammeter
d. Battery voltmeter
e. Test switch facilities

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 23 - Page 2 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 23
EMERGENCY LIGHTING

f. Contactor/relays to BS 5266 Part 3 (vii) fault protection

g. output current limitation
h. lamp indication for appropriate faults e.g. charger fail, low volts etc., with lamp colours in accordance
with BS EN 60073
i. common fault contact for use with a central alarm system or BMS.
8. units shall be provided with composite output distribution boards of the sizes and types indicated on the
Project Drawings
9. units shall be installed complete with all necessary fixings, maintenance equipment and instructions.

O. Batteries:
1. batteries shall be suitable for the discharge duty they will be required to perform.
2. Batteries shall be of the lead acid, sealed re-combination type or Nickel Cadmium depending on the duty
requirements and as indicated on the Project Drawings. The
3. contractor shall submit calculation to justify the Ampere-Hour capacity of the batteries for approval
to the Engineer
4. battery system shall be provided with a suitably rated switch disconnector
5. Batteries shall be mounted on suitable tiered galvanized steel shelving with moulded plastic trays to contain
any leakage from the battery cells and, to allow safe easy access for maintenance
6. battery terminals shall be coated with the battery manufacturer‟s approved grease,
7. and shrouded if not enclosed.

Self Contained Emergency Battery Packs

P. Where a central emergency battery unit is not installed, individual emergency luminaries shall consist of individual
power packs installed within or remote to the luminaries.

Q. Battery pack units shall consist of converter/inverter devices, with nickel-cadmium batteries to provide 3 hours
operation under mains failure, unless the main supply is restored prior to this.

R. Luminaries with self contained battery packs shall be connected to the „live side‟ of the local lighting circuit and
lamps shall operate automatically under mains failure conditions.

S. Units shall have the capability of sustaining high temperature so that they can be accommodated in
fittings with high internal temperatures. However, if the internal temperature of the fittings exceeds 50 °C, the
battery unit shall be mounted remote to the luminaries. In the case of remote mounting, a purpose made remote
mounting box shall be provided.

T. Key operated switches shall be provided, at the locations indicated on the Project Drawings, for all self contained
emergency pack unit luminaries, to control the operation of the luminaries manually for testing purposes. Test
key switches shall be clearly labelled “Emergency Lighting”.

Luminaries and Lamps

U. Previous clauses relating to luminaries and lamps shall also apply to emergency luminaries and lamps.

V. Slave luminaries shall comply with BS 4533 Section 102.22 and BS5225 Part 3 and be as specified.

W. Exit sign luminaries lettering shall be both in Arabic and English. The Arabic text shall be above the English text.

Maximum viewing distance for minimum legend height shall be guided as follows:
H > L/200H = Height of Legend
L = Distance of viewer from the sign
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 23 - Page 3 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 23
EMERGENCY LIGHTING

X. Self contained emergency luminaries shall have a red light emitting diode installed on the luminaries so that the red
light is visible.

Y. With the central battery unit system, emergency luminaries shall be installed with an engraved label fixed to
the outer case of the luminaries, so that it is readily identified. The label shall detail the lamp wattage and rated
voltage.

Z. Generally, marking of emergency luminaries shall comply with BS5266 Part 1.

AA. The following illumination level shall be considered for designing the number of luminaries for emergency lighting:
(refer to BS 5266, Part 1)

Space to Height Ratio for luminaries shall be 4:1

5 lux for vital positions:first aid and safety equipment

exit doors
fire alarm call points
fire fighting equipment
exit and safety signs
changes of direction corridor intersection
adjacent areas of final exit points
1 lux for normal working spaces: on the centreline of escape route toilets
lift cars and moving ways plant rooms
covered car parks

BB. Fluorescent lamps shall be provided for both slave and self contained type luminaire installations. The lamp
wattage ratings shall be chosen from the following table:

Slave : 4 watts or 8 watts

Self contained : 8 watts, 18 watts, 36 watts or 58 watts

Total quantity of luminaries shall be calculated based on the illumination level requirement as per item 7 above, the
type of luminaries and lamp lumens.

Obstruction / Beacon lights

CC. This regulation is mandatory by International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO).

DD. Where a building height is 45m or more, then the contractor shall install permanent obstruction lights as
required by ICAO.

EE. The contractor shall obtain local navigation authorities requirements and approval for this type of installation..

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 23 - Page 4 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 23
EMERGENCY LIGHTING

INSTALLATION
FF. Wiring

1. Where the emergency lighting system installation is via a central battery unit, the wiring to emergency
luminaries shall be carried out in MICC, PVC sheathed cables, unless specified otherwise.
2. Where the emergency lighting scheme is self-contained emergency packs, the wiring system shall either be in
MICC Cables as above or in PVC insulated single core wires in conduits.
2
3. Generally, cables shall be 2.5 mm cross-sectional area unless specified otherwise.
4. The Contractor shall pay careful attention to cable routings so as to keep cable runs to the shortest possible
length and ensure the overall volt drop on any circuit is within the tolerances of the luminaries connected and
within the limits specified in the QGEWC regulations.

Installation of Batteries
GG. The manufacturer‟s recommendation/instructions shall always be followed.

HH. Insulated tools shall be used.

II. Personnel erecting battery banks shall remove metallic objects from their person i.e. watches, rings etc.

JJ. Eye and hand protection shall be provided.

KK. Batteries shall not be left on site for prolonged periods without being trickle charged to maintain their condition
i.e. if delivery is some weeks before commissioning of the charger.

LL. Due care shall be observed when handling acidic substances.

Luminaries and Lamps

MM. Luminaries and lamp installation shall comply with the requirements stipulated in section 26 51 00 for general light
fittings.

Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 263323

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 23 - Page 5 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 53
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

SECTION 263353

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. This Part specifies the requirements for uninterruptible power supply systems

B. A single UPS System shall be provided for the Main Control Room (MCR) Data Communication system
(DCS), and peripheral equipment, essential field instruments and essential equipment subject of Engineer approval.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

The following Standards are referred to in this Part:

IEC 157 ......................Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear
IEC 158 ......................Low Voltage Control gear

1.4 Submissions

A. Submit in accordance with Part 1

B. Shop Drawings: submit dimensional drawings of the UPS, including sections and elevations,
showing the following:
sizes and positions of components
positions and method of fixing cable and boxes
location of terminal boards
Internal wiring diagram
Power and control diagrams
External connection drawing
Component parts lists
Other pertinent data
Spare parts list

C. Project Data: Submit:

full specifications of the enclosure and the components of the equipment with
relevant sheets of manufacturer’s catalogues
confirmation that the equipment complies with the relevant specifications. (iii) Detailed UPS and battery and rectifier
size calculation
Previous approval in similar applications

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 53 - Page 1 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 53
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 System

A. The UPS system shall be comprise of single rectifier, battery charger and inverter modules:
the UPS system shall be designed in such a way that any spare part, printed circuit board, sub-assembly or
component, can be replaced without any adjustment
it shall supply clean, uninterrupted power to the critical loads and meet the specifications
transformers shall be manufactured using vacuum pressure impregnated insulation

B. The Contractor shall assess the electrical load capacity of the UPS taking into account derating for non-linear
loads and worst case ambient temperature conditions.

C. The UPS cabinet shall be designed such that all components are removable from the front and cable entry by floor
mounted gland plates.

D. UPS shall be designed and manufactured “standalone” for automatic operation and as such circuit connections;
protection devices and the like shall comply with BS EN 60950, BS EN50091-3 and BS EN 60439.

E. The UPS shall be designed to supply clean, uninterrupted power to the loads.

F. The design of UPS shall take account of continuous load capacity, de-rating for non-linear loads and ambient
temperature conditions. The UPS shall be sized to supply all instrumentation and control equipment including but not
limited to control and computer room hardware, mimic, annunciation, telecommunication systems and emergency
lighting etc. where applicable.

G. Main Features:
The UPS shall consist of fully controlled rectifier charger, battery bank, inverter, static bypass and manual bypass
capable to providing safe and secure power supply for a minimum period of 8 hours. The UPS shall include the
following features as minimum:-
optimal quality of the output voltage
transient over-voltages and spike protection
voltage variations and mains failures protection
frequency variations protection
true single phase regulation
low noise
low THD (Not to exceed BS G5/4 limits)
PC connectivity for parametering as described under particular requirements.
serial communication 100100 by employing industry standard modbus, fieldbus, NP
etc protocol as described under particular requirements.

2.2 Rectifier/Charger

A. The rectifier/charger shall be of solid-state type with fully controlled 6-pulse thyristor bridge and anti-harmonic chokes.
It shall have 10 sec walk-in ramp for input current, adjustable battery current and voltage.

B. It shall recharge a fully discharge battery in 24 hours. A boost charge facility shall be provided. A normally open
contact rated at 240 Vac, 2A, close on boost charge, shall be provided for remote monitoring. Input voltage ratings are
as follows:
Mains 1 (input to rectifier/charger)
a. Voltage : 415 volts AC ± 10%
b. Wiring : 3-phase, 4 wire + Earth.
c. Frequency : 45 to 55 Hz.
Mains 2 (input to static switch)
d. Voltage : 415 volts AC (± 15%)
e. Wiring : 3-phase, 4 wire + Earth.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 53 - Page 2 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 53
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

f. Frequency : 50 Hz
g. Synchronization Range: ± 0.75 HZ

2.3 Battery

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Project Documentation, the batteries shall be of sealed nickel cadmium
maintenance free type and sized for the pre-selected time with the UPS operating at rated load. The battery bank shall
be sized to maintain full load for a period of 8 hours

B. The inverter shall be of transistorised PWM type, for the specified UPS rated power at 0.8 p.f. Output rating shall be as
follows:
Wiring : 3-phase, 4 wire and earth.
Voltage : 415/240 volts (± 1%), 50 Hz (± 0.25 Hz).
Transient Voltage Regulation : Voltage transients shall not exceed ± 5 % for a 100 % load step change and
the return to steady state value shall be in less than 20 milliseconds.
Harmonic distortion : Less than 4% THD
Efficiency : For 100% load 92% & For 50% load 91%
Audible noise :  65 dBA @ 1.5m
Output synchronised in amplitude, phase & frequency to mains 2 when mains 2 is within tolerance limits. Phase
difference between inverter output and mains 2 held below 3‫( ؛‬electrical) in such condition so that the
maximum gap while transfer to UPS from Mains 2 and vice versa occurs shall be less than 167 micro seconds.

C. Overload Capabilities:

inverter shall sustain 125 % overload for at least 10 minutes and 150 % overloads for 1 minute. After delay, if
overload persists, the load shall be transferred to bypass supply without break if Mains 2 voltage is within tolerance
limits. The UPS shall check the load and if the load is below overload threshold, inverter shall restart automatically
and load shall be transferred back to inverter. Facility to inhibit automatic re-transfer shall be provided.

D. The automatic retransfer to the inverter shall be blocked if a transfer to the mains was initiated six times within
one minute or in case of non-synchronization of the inverter with the mains.

2.4 Static Switch

A. The static switch shall have anti-parallel connected thyristor bank for instantaneous load transfer between the
inverter and the mains 2 supply.

B. Maintenance manual By Pass:

Manual bypass switch system of full UPS shall be integrated into the UPS so that load can be transferred to mains
supply WITHOUT break for maintenance of UPS. Procedure for transfer to maintenance bypass and back to UPS
shall be controlled by the bypass menu of the UPS, thus eliminating possibility of causing disturbance of load by
operator who is unaware of correct procedures.

2.5 Monitoring and Control

A. Monitors:
the following status information shall be monitored by indicating lights on the front panel of the UPS:
a. rectifier-charger on
b. load on inverter
c. load on Mains 2 bypass
d. alarm
e. inverter shutdown imminent
f. boost charge
an audible alarm shall warn the user of faults or operating problems. The system shall be equipped with an alarm off
button. Metering values displayed on an alpha-numeric display.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 53 - Page 3 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 53
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

The following measurements shall be available:

g. inverter output voltage (L-L)
h. inverter output frequency
i. inverter output currents
j. voltage across battery terminals
k. current (charge/discharge)
l. mains 1 (rectifier/charger) input voltages (L-L)
m. rectifier/charger input currents.

B. Remote Control And Monitoring:

Remote transmission shall be provided for all controls, monitors and measurement indication on the UPS unit to the
site PLC/SCADA.

2.6 Test Procedures

A. For UPS larger than 75 KW the Contractor shall provide a Works Test Report. The integrated functional test
shall be conducted at manufacturer’s works to ensure satisfactorily functioning of the equipment.

B. The Assembly shall not leave the manufacturer’s works until the works test sheets have been duly approved and
stamped by the Engineer and written permission is obtained for their dispatch to site.

C. The UPS manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance Program. In particular the main
equipment manufacturing stages sanctioned by appropriate tests such as: incoming components inspection, discrete
sub-assembly tests and complete functional checks on the final product. Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in
leaving the factory. Final inspection and calibration operations shall be documented in a report drawn up by the
supplier’s Quality Inspection department

2.7 Environment

0 0
A. Ambient temperature : 0 C to + 50

B. Maximum relative humidity : 95 %

2.8 Protective Devices, Controls and Monitors

A. The UPS shall be built on modular basis.

B. Main Protections - The UPS shall include the following protections as minimum:-
Input over voltage
Load short circuit
Over temperature
Surge protection
Noise protection
Battery deep discharge protection

C. Controls shall be micro processor based and the following main controls shall be possible:
rectifier/charger on/off
inverter on/off
forced shutdown
forced transfer upon forced shutdown of inverter when the bypass power supply (mains 2) is outside tolerances
self-test

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 53 - Page 4 of 5
 SECTION 26 33 53
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

2.9 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 263353

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 33 53 - Page 5 of 5
 SECTION 26 35 33
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL AND DEVICES

SECTION 263533

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Cartridge fuses for voltage up to 1000 V ac - BS 88

B. Capacitors for connection to power frequency systems - BS 1650

C. Control gear for voltage up to 1000 V ac - BS EN 60949

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 35 33 - Page 1 of 4
 SECTION 26 35 33
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL AND DEVICES

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONSTRUCTION OF THE ASSEMBLY

A. The capacitor bank panel enclosure construction shall conform to Form-3B Type-2.

B. The assembly shall be 600V Rating, indoor gasketed type of size, rating and arrangement as indicated on the Drawings.

C. The complete assembly shall be ground mounting type with matching cases to form continuous internal struc-
tures.

D. The arrangement of the equipment within the assemblies shall be individually-mounting type in a modular
arrangement and shall be such as to afford maximum accessibility to all parts, incoming and outgoing wires and
cables.

E. The assembly shall be completely wired and tested at the factory, ready for installation when received at the site.
Bracing shall be provided to prevent distortion in handling and shipping.

F. The assembly shall be suitably braced for the short circuit duty shown on the Drawings, at nominal operating voltage.

G. Approved nameplates, permanently mounted for identification of all major and control equipment shall be
provided

H. The enclosure and other steel works of the panel shall pass through a four stage finishing process such as chemical
spray, degreasing, iron phosphating and finally give a top coat of polyester powder electrostatically deposited and cured
in a high temperature oven to give a strong molecular bonding with the steel.

I. The final color of the enclosure shall be as per the manufacturer’s standard. All steel screws, nuts, bolts, shall be zinc
plated and isolated to prevent rusting.

J. The assembly shall consist of a completely enclosed self supporting metal structure, containing circuit protective
devices and all other associated equipment as indicated on the Drawings and/or specified under other Clauses.

K. The assembly shall consist of the required number of formed and welded sheet steel enclosures required to mount
circuit protective devices and other equipment.

L. Bolted frames shall be provided at the rear to support and house copper busbars, cables and other accessories.

M. Front, side and top plates shall be steel, removable and not less than 2 mm thickness.

N. All fastenings between structural members shall be bolted, not welded to provide flexibility during installation.

O. The arrangement shall permit cables to enter from bottom and top of the enclosure and connect to their respective
terminals without interference. The assembly shall be provided with cable racks and bolting down holes.

P. A modular individual mounting arrangement (in Form of Construction) as indicated on the drawings) shall be used and
the internal separations shall be carried out using rigid barriers or partitions.

2.2 MATERIAL

A. The automatic power factor correction capacitor panels shall correct the power factor to between 0.93 and unity.

B. Capacitors with suitable harmonic suppression detuned series reactors are to be offered for those sections of the
network, where there are harmonic generating loads like variable speed drives for elevators, UPS systems, Motors,
Machines, computers, etc.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 35 33 - Page 2 of 4
 SECTION 26 35 33
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL AND DEVICES

C. The contractor should check for the same from the load details furnished and furnish appropriate offers accordingly.

D. The power factor control panel enclosures are floor mounted or wall mounted type made of sheet steel with a minimum
degree of protection of IP 54, complete with a hinged lockable door.

E. The capacitor panels shall be equipped with the following:

1. Main incoming isolating switch

2. Automatic microprocessor based power factor controller (mounted on front of panel).
3. LV power factor improvement capacitors, arranged in suitable numbers of steps
4. Detuned 3 phase reactors, iron cored and with copper windings to be connected in series with each capacitor
stage for harmonic current suppression. (These reactors are to be offered along with capacitors for only these
sections which have harmonic generating loads).
5. 3 pole contactors especially selected for the maximum possible inrush current of the capacitors under normal
service conditions (voltage, current, harmonies, temperature, etc.) as defined in IEC 831-1. To be rated for 1.5
times the rated capacitor current.
6. H.R.C. fuses, TP-one for each stage, with a fuse rupturing capacity not less 1.6 times the rated current (In).
7. Over voltage protection relay
8. The automatic power factor correction panels should be ready for field connection with all components labeled
for easy identification. Tinned copper busbars of compatible current ratings and dimensions shall be used for
the main incomer connection. A fan along with filter should be provided in the enclosure for the capacitor
banks rated 200 k VAR and higher.

F. The capacitors shall be rated for 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz supply.

G. The capacitors shall be of the self healing type, with dielectric being zinc metallized polypropylene.

H. The capacitors shall be leakage proof dry type. Filling jelly, wax or gas is not acceptable.

I. The capacitors shall have permanently connected built in discharge resistors sized to ensure safe discharge of the
capacitors to less than 50 volts in 1 min after switch off.

J. The controller shall in addition to the self healing, have a double protection system working independently and
sequentially like an individual element protection system coupled with a second and global capacitors protection by
internal compressible material inside a strong steel cabinet. Over pressure disconnections are not acceptable.

K. Temperature category will be -25/D as per IEC 831-1 latest edition.

L. Total losses in the capacitors including those in the discharge resistors should be less than 0.5 watts/KVAR.

M. The steel capacitor enclosure for each of the units shall have a minimum protection of IP 42. For capacitor units above
25 KVAR, aluminum thermal equalizers shall be used around each capacitor element to ensure effective heat
dissipation.

N. The power factor regulator shall have the following features:

1. To be digital microprocessor based and user programmable

2. To allow for selection/programming of capacitors steps in circular or linear mode.
3. To adjust for different switching times between steps from 1 sec to 120 sec or 1 min to 120 min.
4. Power factor setting: 0.70 inductive to 0.70 capacitive.
5. Programmable to 79 steps and 12 outputs to be provided with a front lockable door and rating of the controller
to IP 55.
6. To be insensitive to harmonies
7. To allow for manual or automatic switching of the steps
8. Automatic no volt release.
9. To have built-in digital power factor meter.
10. To have a built in fault indicator.
11. The controller shall also monitor and measure the following:

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 35 33 - Page 3 of 4
 SECTION 26 35 33
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION PANEL AND DEVICES

12. Voltage, current, apparent power and reactive power.

13. The controller shall have LED indicator for each of the capacitor steps as well as the various monitoring,
measurement and fault indicator functions.
14. The controller shall be suitable for an operation temperature range of -10 deg. C to +70 deg. C.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Check all connections made at factory for mechanical security and electrical security.

B. All routine tests shall be conducted as per latest IEC standards.

C. Test power factor and connection at maximum full load and provide tabulated test results.

3.2 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture .

END OF SECTION 263533

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 35 33 - Page 4 of 4
 SECTION 26 36 00
TRANSFER SWITCHES

SECTION 263600

TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

B. The automatic load transfer equipment shall be designed to comply with the following criteria:

1. Monitor voltage of normal power supply.

2. Initiate cranking of the generator on failure of normal power.
3. Transfer load from normal supply to generator when it reaches its rated speed, voltage and frequency.
4. Re-transfer load from generator to normal power supply when normal power is restored.
5. Shut down generator unit.
6. Co-ordinate with generator supplier to ensure compatibility for control operation

C. The system shall include conduits, fittings (couplings, bends, boxes, cover plates, reducers, adaptors, etc.) and all
necessary parts to install a complete conduit system.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. UL 1008 - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches.

B. NFPA-70, NFPA-110 - National Electrical Code incl. use in emergency & standby systems.

C. IEEE 446, IEEE 241 - Emergency & Standby power systems.

D. NEMA ICS-2-447 - AC Automatic Transfer Switches.

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 36 00 - Page 1 of 3
 SECTION 26 36 00
TRANSFER SWITCHES

B. Conduits and fittings shall be distinctively marked as manufactured for electrical purposes.

C. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. The automatic transfer switches shall be 415V, three phase, and neutral 4 pole contactor type in double throw
arrangement with microprocessor controls in accordance with QGEWC regulations.

B. The switches shall be transfer-bypass type, with draw out transfer mechanism and controls. Bypass switches shall
permit maintenance of the transfer switching and controls without interruption of service.

C. The enclosures shall be (IP55), finished in light grey enamel. The front panel shall be hinged for access for inspection
and maintenance. All sections shall be 2 mm zinc coated with corrosion resistant treatment.

D. The switches shall be double throw, mechanically and electrically interlocked, and mechanically held in both positions.

E. Failure of any electrical component or disarrangement of any part shall not permit the switch to remain in a neutral
position.

F. The operating mechanism shall obtain its power from the source to which the load is being transferred.

G. An auxiliary contact shall close, starting the engine - alternator set, when the voltage in any phase falls to 75% of rated
for an adjustable period of 0.5-6 seconds, factory set a 2 seconds. When the alternator voltage has risen to 90% of rated
on all phases, the switch shall transfer from the normal to the emergency source.

H. The switch shall retransfer to the normal source when all phases have remained above 90% of rated, for an adjustable
time period of 0 to 30 minutes.

I. The switch shall be equipped with a timer to keep the engine running for an adjustable period of 0 to 5 minutes after the
load has been retransferred to the normal source.

J. The switch shall be equipped with an in-phase monitor or equivalent arrangement for retransferring to the normal
source.

K. One 4-position off-auto-run-test control switch shall be provided on the front of the enclosure. The run position shall
start the engine without operating the transfer switch. The test position shall simulate a power failure and shall transfer
the load to the emergency source.

L. The switch shall transfer when the voltage in any phase falls to 70% of rated, and shall retransfer when all phases have
remained above 90% of rated, for an adjustable time period of 0 to 10 minutes.

M. The switch shall be equipped with a timer to delay transfer for an adjustable period of 0 to 30 seconds, to prevent
transferring during testing of the standby power system.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 36 00 - Page 2 of 3
 SECTION 26 36 00
TRANSFER SWITCHES

N. One 3-position off-auto-test switch shall be provided on the front of the enclosure.

O. All control gear shall be calibrated for operating conditions in a 50°C ambient temperature.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate, install and connect transfer equipment.

B. Check relays and solid state monitors and adjust as required.

C. Install and connect battery and remote alarms.

3.2 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved manufacture.

END OF SECTION 263600

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 36 00 - Page 3 of 3
 SECTION 26 41 13
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

SECTION 264113

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A This Part specifies the requirements for lightening protection.

1.2 REFERENCES

A The following standards are referred to in this Part:

BS 6651 Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning.
BS 7430 Code of practice for earthing

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A The lightning protection system shall be in accordance with QGEWC Rules and Regulations.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A submit full technical details and conductor size calculations of each type of cable or wire proposed
B submit exact route of each cable or wire proposed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A Generally:
(1) products used in the lightning protection system shall be copper or an approved copper alloy, unless
otherwise specified, and specifically manufactured for the purpose.
B Air Termination Conductors and Down Conductors:
(2) lightning air terminals and down conductors for lightning air terminals shall be provided as indicated
on the drawings. Where vertical air terminations are used, they shall be min of 15 mm
diameter tinned copper (air termination rod)
0.8 meter long with top spike, unless otherwise specified in the Project
Documentation
(3) generally, roof conductors and down conductors shall be of PVC sheathed 3 x 20 mm (minimum) copper
tape. PVC colour to be approved by the Engineer. However, bare copper tape may be unless indicated
otherwise on the Project Drawings or Specification
(4) air termination rods shall be securely anchored and welded

(5) down conductors shall be run along the outer surface of the wall or column of the building
(6) down conductors shall be as short as possible, protected and directly connected to earthing system through
test links (refer to item 7 below)
(7) anchoring bolts shall be used to hold roof conductors and down conductors in firm position
(8) lightning conductor connectors shall be provided for conductor splice connections and conductor terminal
connections
(9) the connectors shall be heavy duty, cast metal and shall have hex-head screws in the bodies and holes in the
tongues for bolts
(10) TV antenna, HVAC equipment, handrails and structures in the vicinity of the lightning protection system, if
any, shall be bonded to the system by 3x20 sq. mm (minimum) PVC sheathed copper tape.

C Main Earth Loops:

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 41 13 - Page 1 of 3
 SECTION 26 41 13
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

(1) 25 x 3 mm tinned copper tape, unless otherwise indicated on the Project Drawings or
Specification.

D Earth Electrodes:
(1) shall be of the earth rod type
(2) earth rod electrodes: 16 mm diameter steel core copper jacketed type, comprising a high strength steel
alloy core with a molten welded copper covering, minimum 0.25 mm thick
(3) to be not less than 3.6 m long, in 1.2 m sections coupled by strong bronze couplers.

E Earth Connectors:
(1) shall connection of rod electrodes: bolted type.

F Removable Earth Links:

(1) to comprise a bolted copper link fixed on porcelain insulators and complete with studs, nuts and
washers to take the earth tape and a bolted lug adequately sized for the final connection of the earth
electrode.

G Bolts, Washers And Nuts In Bolted Connections:

(1) high copper alloy or silicone bronze. Ferrous hardware is not acceptable.

H Earth Pit Cover

(1) shall be of heavy duty construction
(2) shall have a recessed lifting hook
(3) shall have a brass plate, engraved “Electrical Earth Below”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A Removable Earth Links

(1) fix in every main earth lead to enable the electrode system to be disconnected for testing
(2) install in an accessible position, above ground as close as possible to the earth electrode.

B Bolted Connections:
(1) multiple bolt type
(2) where bare copper is bolted in connections contact surfaces shall be silver
electroplated.
C Brazed Connections:
(1) where earthing terminal connections are to be brazed to equipment, thoroughly clean metal prior to brazing
and repaint impaired surfaces to prevent corrosion.

D Connections Between Dissimilar Metals:

(1) protect by:
(i) painting with a moisture resistant bituminous paint or compound, or
(ii) wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.

E Earth Rod Electrodes:

(1) extensible rods of the same diameter shall be installed in holes drilled into the ground.
If ground conditions permit, rods may be driven into the ground either manually or mechanically. The earth
electrode shall be installed at such a depth that it penetrates
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 41 13 - Page 2 of 3
 SECTION 26 41 13
LIGHTNING PROTECTION

the summer water table by a minimum of 2 metres. Under no circumstances shall lightning protection
electrodes be connected to any QGEWC earthing electrode. A minimum distance of 7 metres shall be
provided between any lightning earth electrode and a QGEWC earth electrode.
(2) weld earth connectors to the top of the rods, in sufficient number to make connection with all incoming
cables.

F Earth Pit:
(1) provide a concrete/PVC pit complete with a heavy duty concrete, cast iron or PVC cover with recessed
lifting hook to the Engineers written approval, at the head of the earth rod, to protect the rod and allow access
to connections for testing.

3.2 TESTING

A Testing earthing systems by the earth megger test.

B The resistance of any one point in the lightning protection earth continuity system to the main earth electrode shall
not exceed 10 ohms, unless allowed otherwise by QGEWC, without taking account of any bonding to other services.

C Install additional earth electrodes in parallel, if these figures are not met.

3.3. Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 264113

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 41 13 - Page 3 of 3
 SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 265100

LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

B. The Contractor shall supply, install and connect the lighting fixtures including but not limited to lamps, ballasts,
accessories, fixing hardware necessary for installations, as required.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate with other Divisions to ensure location and installation of lighting fixtures &
accessories to avoid confliction.

D. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Fixtures shall be completely wired and constructed to comply with IEC Publication 598-1 598-2 and

BS EN 60598-1: 1993 unless otherwise specified.

B. IEC/PAS 62717 Performance requirements – LED modules for general lighting

C. IEC/PAS 62722 Performance requirements – LED luminaires for general lighting

D. Specification for Lighting Fixtures - BS EN 60598-1:1993.

E. Specifications for Lighting Fixtures Photometric -BS 5225

F. Hight pressure mercury vapour lamps -BS 3677

G. Hight pressure sodium vapour lamps -BS 60662

H. Metal Halide lamps -BS 61167

I. Degree of protection provided by encolsures -BS 60529

J. General rules of low voltage switch gear and control gear -BS 61167

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 51 00 - Page 1 of 7
 SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit full technical details of the fittings , with attached manufacture’s catalogues and illumination
data sheets, type & quality of all metal finishes and size & quality of all glassware

B. One piece at least of each lighting fixture originally specified shall be submitted and displayed at the site office to site
engineer.

C. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background (coordination) drawings complete with
sections, views, control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULE OF LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Refer to Internal Design Drawings

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Fixture, housing, frame or canopy, shall provide a suitable cover for fixture outlet box or fixture opening.

B. Fixtures shall not cause a temperature exceeding 90 degree centigrade on any outside surface.

C. Fixtures shall bear manufacturer's name and the factory inspection label.

D. Re-lamping the fixture shall be possible without having to remove the fixture from its place.

E. Certain fixtures may be shown in provisional position.They shall be exactly located as soon as the final layout of
equipment is known.

F. Any plastics used in the luminaire shall be light and U.V. stable and shall be suitable for their application.

G. All sheet steel components shall be suitably pre-treated and electrostatically spray-painted using acrylic polyester or
epoxy powder paint.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 51 00 - Page 2 of 7
 SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

H. Fixtures that are used under canopy or directly exposed to weather shall be considered as being outdoor type.

I. Indoor fixtures shall be constructed of 0.7 mm thick steel minimum. If other metals are used they shall be of the
required thickness to have at least the same mechanical strength.

J. Cast portions of fixtures shall be not less than 1.5 mm thick.

K. Metal parts of the fixtures shall be completely free from burrs and tool marks. Solder shall not be used as a mechanical
fastening device on any part of the fixture.

L. Fixtures with visible frame shall have concealed hinges and catches.

M. Recessed fixture shall be constructed so as to fit into ceiling without distorting either the fixture or the ceiling. Plaster
rings shall be provided for plaster ceilings. The Contractor shall coordinate the dimensions with the false ceiling
tile or panel dimensions.

N. Outdoor fixtures (under canopy or directly exposed to the weather) shall be constructed of an appropriate weather
resistant material including gaskets to prevent entrance of water into wiring.

O. External fixtures shall be constructed to minimum classification of IP55 and be class II unless otherwise stated.

P. All external fixture finish shall be suitable for saline and hostile environment.

Q. Fixtures with hinged diffuser doors shall be provided with spring clips or other retaining devices to prevent the diffuser
from moving.

R. Bathroom fixtures shall be marked as being suitable for damp locations and shall be of minimum IP44 degree of
protection, class-1. Lamp holders of such fixtures shall be provided with a protective shield to prevent contact with the
lamp cap.

S. Fixtures with exposed metal parts shall be provided with a means for connecting an equipment earthing conductor for
such fixtures.

T. Heat generated by any lighting fixture shall not affect any part of the fitting.

U. All luminaires shall be certified by the manufacturer for use in an ambient temperature of 50°C.

V. Diffuser and the body of the lighting fixtures shall be guaranteed for stable color for 5 years under the site condition.

2.3 LED FIXTURES

A. The light source shall be high brightness white light emitting Diodes (LEDs) with individual minimum efficacy of at
least 100lm/W arranged modularly to provide the required lighting output. All lumen figures shall be Deliver (WARM)
Lumens.

B. The LEDs shall be from a reputed manufacturer of LEDs with proven past performance in accordance with
ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – (American National Standard for Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting
Products) or similar approved International Standard.

C. The LEDs shall be removable/replaceable on site by modular means without any possible risk to maintaining luminaire
photometry and without the need to demount the fixtures for sake of future upgrading/maintenance requirements.

D. The luminaire shall be fitted with optical refractors, diffusers and/or reflectors. Different optics shall be proposed to
exactly suit the specific applications.

E. Luminaires containing compact LED lamps shall be designed to ensure the correct working conditions for the lamp.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 51 00 - Page 3 of 7
 SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

2.4 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES

A. Fixtures shall be provided with white click-in type lamp holders.

B. Pendent individually mounted fixtures 60 cm and longer shall be provided with twin stem hangers. Stems shall
have ball aligners and provision for a minimum of 2.5 cm vertical adjustment.

C. Diffusers shall be manufactured from one piece non-glued methacrylate for ID area and poly carbonate for service
room / non-ID areas.

D. Mirror system light controlled fixtures shall comprise a metal encased aluminum mirror system with aluminum
mirror strips forming a parabolic reflector. Lamps shall be screened in the longitudinal direction by means of matt-
white louver partitions unless otherwise specified on the drawings.

E. Luminance control shall be CIBSE LG3 CAT-2

F. Clear smooth diffusers shall be smooth from outside, finely grained from inside.

G. Corrosion resistant fixtures shall comprise polyester resin fiber-glass reinforced body, dust and splash-proof.

H. Damp-resistant fixtures shall comprise polyester resin fiberglass reinforced body, dust and jet-proof.

I. Luminaires containing compact fluorescent lamps shall be designed to ensure the correct working conditions for the
lamp.

J. All compact fluorescent luminaires shall, unless otherwise stated, be supplied with low loss control gear and single
pulse electronic starters.

2.5 FINISH

A. Non-reflecting surfaces such as fixture frames and trims shall be finished with baked enamel paint, unless otherwise
specified. The color of the paint shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as directed later by the Engineer on Site.

B. Light reflecting surfaces shall be finished with baked white enamel paint having a reflection factor of not less than
85%.

C. All parts of the reflector shall be completely covered by the finish and free from irregularities.

D. Unpainted surfaces shall be finished with a clear lacquer except for anodized surfaces.

E. After finish has been applied and cured, it shall be capable of withstanding a 1 cm radius bend without showing
signs of cracking, peeling or loosening from the base metal.

F. Finish shall be capable of withstanding 72 hours exposure to an ultra-violet RS sun lamp placed 10 cm from the
surface without discoloration, hardening, or warping and shall retain the same reflection characteristics after
exposure.

G. Finish shall be subject to Client / Architect’s approval.

2.6 LAMPS – GENERAL

A. Lamps shall be supplied and installed in all lighting fixtures listed in the Schedule of Lighting Fixtures on the
Drawings.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 51 00 - Page 4 of 7
 SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

B. Lamps used for temporary lighting services shall not be used in the final lamping of fixture units.

C. Lamps shall be of wattage and type as shown in the Schedule of Lighting Fixtures.

D. Lamps for permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixtures, until so directed by the Engineer, and this shall
be accomplished directly before the building areas are ready for occupancy by the Employer.

2.7 LAMPS – FLUORESCENT

A. Lamps shall be of the normal start energy saving type, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tubular fluorescent lamps shall be T5 16 mm dia. and shall have tri-phosphor coating.

C. Lamps shall have bi-pin bases and a minimum approximate rated life of 8,000 hours.

D. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be of the 4-pin type manufactured in accordance with BS 6982.

E. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be suitable for operating as emergency lighting sources where specified.

F. Compact fluorescent lamps shall be suitable for operating on standard wire wound and H.F. ballasts.

G. Where the lamps are used horizontally, they shall be adequately supported along their length.

H. Lamps shall have WHITE colour rendering unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 LAMPS – LED

A. Total luminous flux (lumens) must be measured as per IES LM-79-08

B. LED lamps shall be either mains-voltage or low voltage type as described in the lighting fixtures schedules in the
drawings.

C. The LED driver must be listed in the provided technical speciation

D. Lamps must be permanently marked by molded imprint or ink with manufacturer name, model number, electrical
rating, and approval agency (CSA, UL, etc. )

E. Lamp Life time should be in range 25,000 to 36,000 hours at minimum.

F. All LED products must have a minimum five year warranty.

2.9 LAMPS - MERCURY VAPOUR, AND METAL HALIDE

A. Mercury lamps shall be high-pressure mercury-vapour fluorescent lamps, with a quartz discharge tube enclosed in an
internally coated ovoid outer bulb.

B. The quartz discharge tube shall contain a small quantity of mercury and a starting gas.

C. The average luminous flux after 100 burning house shall for a 50 W lamp, be 1850 lumens horizontal and 2000 lumens
vertical. The number of minutes after which the lamp has reached 80% of its final luminous flux shall not exceed 5
minutes for 50 W lamps, and 4 minutes for higher wattage lamps.

D. Lamps below 125 W shall be fitted with normal glass and lamps 125 W and above shall be fitted with hard glass.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 51 00 - Page 5 of 7
 SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

E. Metal Halide lamps shall be similar to mercury vapor lamps except that the discharge tube shall contain metal halide
compounds and the average luminous output after 100 burning hours for a 375W lamp shall not be less than 30000lm

2.10 STARTERS - FLUORESCENT (ELECTRONIC)

A. Starters shall be electronic type, enclosed in a polycarbonate box mounted inside the luminaries with the ballast.

B. Electronic starters shall comply with BS 3772 Part 1.

C. Starter shall provide immediate ignition (0.5 seconds) of standard fluorescent lamps to comply with BS 3772.

D. Starters shall have negligible watt loss, and shall be noiseless.

2.11 BALLASTS - FLUORESCENT (ELECTRONIC)

A. Ballast shall be solid state electronic controlled type with no noise nuisance, high operating frequency, 0.95 power
factor, instant non-flickering start, automatic switch-off if lamp is defective, no stroboscopic effect and no electrode
flickering.

B. All components shall be mounted on a common wiring board, with a sheet metal housing for mechanical
protection. It shall require no starter.

2.12 CAPACITORS

A. Power factor correction capacitors shall be metal foil dry type impregnated paper, metalized film or polypropylene
film, encased in an insulated aluminum canister.

B. Capacitors shall be rated at 250V, 50/60 Hz and BS EN 61049:1993. They shall be rated 800 volt, 50/60Hz.

C. Radio interference suppression capacitors shall be dry type ceramic or equivalent complying with BS EN 61048:1993
7. They shall be rated at 800 volts, 50/60 Hz.

2.13 WIRING

A. Fused terminal blocks shall be fitted and be of sufficient capacity for the wiring involved. Each terminal shall be
capable of accommodating two 2.5 mm2 conductors.

B. Connector strip terminals shall have a current rating not less than the rating of the circuit protective device and they are
provided in boxes behind heat producing appliances. Porcelain connectors shall be used where temperatures exceed 70°

C. All light fittings shall be provided with an earthing terminal which shall be connected to the earth continuity lead to the
final sub-circuit.

2.14 Ceiling System

A. In false ceilings, luminaires whether surface or recessed mounted shall not be supported by the false ceiling
construction. Separate independent supporting systems shall be provided for each luminaire, comprising drop rods,
chains or similar.

B. Luminaires installed in false ceilings shall be connected to the lighting circuit using mechanically coupled plug-
in ceiling roses.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 51 00 - Page 6 of 7
 SECTION 26 51 00
LIGHT FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES

C. Luminaires shall be positioned to provide ease of access for maintenance, cleaning etc., while not impairing the
distribution of light.

D. The Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire manufacturer has the correct details of the ceiling system, including
suspension, tiles, etc. He shall ensure that the luminaires are supplied with the correct trim, suspension system and are
fully compatible with the ceiling system

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights as detailed on the Drawings or as instructed on Site by the Engineer.

B. Mock-up installation of each type of light fixture shall be done for each typical area.

C. Fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately support the complete weight of the
fixture. Design of hangers and method of fastening, other than shown on the Drawings or, herein specified, shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review and acceptance.

D. Pendent fixtures within the same room or area shall be installed plumb and at a uniform height from the finished floor.
Adjustment of height shall be made during installation.

E. Flush mounted recessed fixtures, shall be installed so as to completely eliminate leakage of light within fixture and
between the fixture and adjacent finished surface.

F. Prior to manufacturing clearance, contractor shall closely coordinate with other services and trades to confirm depth of
recessed type light fixtures.

G. Fixtures mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to outlet box. Hickeys or extension pieces shall be installed
where required to facilitate proper installation.

H. Surface mounted fixtures longer than 60 cm shall have one additional point of support besides the outlet box fixture
stud when installed individually.

I. Fixtures located on the exterior of the building shall be installed with non-ferrous metal screws finished to match the
fixtures.

J. Fixtures installed in false ceiling shall be connected to the relevant lighting outlet through a flexible cord & ceiling rose

K. Each fixture shall have its corresponding lighting outlet.

L. External light fixtures shall be installed on concrete foundations as per light fixture manufacturer’s recommendation
such as size, provision for cable entry/exit, etc.

3.2 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 265100

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 26 51 00 - Page 7 of 7
 SECTION 27 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELV SYSTEMS

SECTION 270526

EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELV SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Conductors:

1. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire.

2. Cable tray grounding jumpers.
3. Bare copper conductors: stranded.

B. Connectors: Bolted, compression, signal-reference grid, busbar, and exothermic-welded type.

C. Grounding Busbars :

1. TMGB and TGB: Predrilled rectangular copper bars with stand-off insulators.
2. Rack and cabinet grounding busbars.

D. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 19 mm by 3 m in diameter.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 05 26 - Page 1 of 2
 SECTION 27 05 26
EARTHING AND BONDING FOR ELV SYSTEMS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LABELING

A. Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor engaged.

3.3 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture .

END OF SECTION 270526

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 05 26 - Page 2 of 2
 SECTION 27 11 00
TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

SECTION 271100

TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

D. Telephone system shall be complete with all external ductwork including Draw Pits, cable tray, trunking, conduit,
telephone outlet points, supports and the like as detailed on the drawings.

E. Materials shall be approved by Local Service Provider.

F. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. Conform to standards (EIA/TIA, Cenelec, ISO)

B. Conform to OOREDOO regulation

C. Local Service Provider

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. Telephone cabling and equipment supply and installation shall be carried out by an approved OOREDOO contractor
specialising in telephone installations.

B. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

C. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 11 00 - Page 1 of 6
 SECTION 27 11 00
TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING (UTP CAT6)

A. The Horizontal Cabling comprises of Cat6a cables laid between the floor distributor and the work area outlets and used
for data application. Fiber to the desk (FTTD) may be used if the horizontal distance exceeds 90m.

B. Computer network conduits will be twisted unshielded 4 pairs category 6 (UTP 4P), linking each point individually to
the patch panel as shown on drawings. These cables shall conform to ANSIITINEIA-568-A Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling Standard and ISOIIEC.

2.2 BACKBONE CABLING (Fiber Optic Cables)

A. The Backbone cabling is the cabling that extends from floor distributors to building distributor. It Fiber Optic cables.

B. All fiber optics should meet a minimum of 10GB/s bandwidth.

C. Fiber optic cables used for vertical links should have the following characteristics:

1. Mini-tube type structure,

2. Cable reinforced with coated glass fiber,
3. LSOH Polyethylene outer jacket,
4. Metric marking indicating type of cable, year, ref., number,
5. Secondary coating: 250 µm,
6. Maximum allowable tension: 1300 N,
7. External diameter: 7 mm,
8. Installation temperature: 0°C / +40°C,
9. Storage/transport temperature: -20°C / +70°C,
10. Operating temperature: -10°C / +60°C,
11. Minimum bending radius:
11.1 Static: 100 mm,
11.2 Dynamic: 140 mm.
12. Crush resistance: 300 N/cm,
13. Weight: 55 kg/km,
14. Complies with IEC 60754-1,
15. Complies with IEC 60332-3C.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 11 00 - Page 2 of 6
 SECTION 27 11 00
TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

2.3 DATA CABINETS

A. Data cabinet will be 19" open rack, made of metal alloy, corrosion resistant, dust proof, with wire guide rings, cable
guides with clamps, earthing terminal and a compartment for storing technical sheets and drawings.

B. Each cabinet shall be sufficient for the complete connection of all relevant cables plus 30%
spare space for future growth.

C. The patch/distribution panels shall be adaptable to 19" wide equipment racks.

D. Telecommunications closets shall have the following specification :

1. 19" Open Rack

2. with wheels for location changes.
3. with second mounting angles
4. 19" power distribution panel, Minimum 8 Sockets.
5. Lamp.
6. Complete earthing system.
7. Complete cable management system (cable hoops, cable tray, cable guide (Horizontal cable
support, patch guide, Fiber tray)
8. Minimum Capacity 24U.

2.4 PATCH PANEL

Category patch panel shall:

1. Be made of black anodized aluminum, in 16-, 24-, 48-, 64- and 96-port configurations.

2. Accommodate at least 24 ports for each rack mount space.

3. Have circuit boards tested in both directions as required by ANSIITIAlEIA"'568-A and ISOIIEC 11801.

4. Utilizes tri-balance technology with optimized pair balance design and linear crosstalk
Response to address applications up to 250 MHz.

5. Have termination accomplished with a single conductor impact tool.be backwards compatible to allow lower
performing categories of cables or connecting hardware to operate to their full capacity.

6. Have rear protective strain relief caps with side or rear entry, which can be installed onto
16. Cable before or after termination.

7. Support industry standards for T568A or T5688 wiring options on each individual outlet.

8. Allow for a minimum of 200 re-terminations without signal degradation below standards compliance limit.

9. Have modular ports compliant with FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F and IEC 60603-7 with
50 micro inches of gold plating over nickel contacts.

10. Be fully enclosed front and rear for physical protection of printed circuit board.

11. Have a rear cable management bar for strain relief.

12. Have port identification numbers on both the front and rear of the panel.

13. Have optional adhesive circuit identification and color coding designation strips provided with the panel.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 11 00 - Page 3 of 6
 SECTION 27 11 00
TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

14. Provide self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels with the panel,
with optional color labels available.

15. Be made by an ISO 9001 and 14001 Certified Manufacturer.

2.5 TELEPHONE OUTLETS

A. The Contractor shall supply and install telephone points and the associated mains power outlets which shall conform to
BS1363 .

B. The telephone outlets shall be jack type and from the same manufacturer, and finish as for the lighting and general
power outlets, unless specified otherwise.

C. Telephone outlets shall be of the type approved by OOREDOO

2.6 IPTV OUTLETS

A. The Contractor shall supply and install IP based TV points and the associated mains power outlets which shall conform
to BS1363 .

B. The IPTV outlets shall be jack type and from the same manufacturer, and finish as for the lighting and general power
outlets, unless specified otherwise.

C. IPTV outlets shall be of the type approved by OOREDOO

2.7 GROUNDING

A. Proper grounding and bonding is essential and reference shall be made to proper codes and standards.
Grounding of metal shield shall be made with 16 mm2 copper wire. Backbone systems must
comply with all applicable National, Regional, or Local building and electrical codes.

B. Each distribution rack shall be connected to the ground bus in accordance with the applicable
code Requirements as per EIAITIA 607.

C. Backbone cabling utilizing a shield shall be bonded at each sheath opening.

2.8 FIXING, LABELING AND MARKING ACCESSORIES

A. Fixing accessories shall include cable ties, clamp ties, push mounted ties, marker ties. All outlets, patch
panels, cross-connects, cabinets... shall be labeled using a mechanically imprinted label similar to Brady or
a system as proposed by the contractor and agreed by the Engineer. Regardless of the numbering scheme, every
cable has the same permanent identifier at both ends. Each label shall indicate, according to approved labeling
designations, the number of the cable concerned, where it is coming from and where it is going to.

B. Horizontal cables shall be labeled at each end.The cable or its label shall be marked with its identifier. A unique
identifier shall be marked on each faceplate to identify it as connecting hardware. Each port in the faceplate shall
be labeled with its identifier.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 11 00 - Page 4 of 6
 SECTION 27 11 00
TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

2.9 CABLE LAYING

A. Data and telephone cables shall run in dedicated raceways apart from those where power cables are laid as
shown on drawings Data and telephone cables shall run in dedicated raceways apart from those where
power cables are laid as shown on drawings.

B. Before the start of cable works, the site shall be properly checked in order to ensure that the raceways,
whatsoever, are clean and dry. Cables shall be carefully unreeled from drums, and pulled-in/laid on raceways
according to the approved shop drawings and work procedure. Specialized rolls and tools shall be used for
main cable works so as the cables shall not be dragged on ground or surfaces. Cables are to run concealed
above cable trays, and through embedded pipes. After the network is satisfactorily completed and

C. Tested, cables shall be tied to cable trays and labeled as necessary. For any cable, the maximum distance
between two successive ties shall not exceed five meters except for vertical riser cables where the maximum distance
shall be two meters. Cables shall be labeled at every terminal location, every bent, before every distribution unit
and at every fan-out. Moreover, vertical main cables along the riser, shall be labeled twice at each floor

D. Cables shall be terminated at the distribution units where they shall be held, fanned out properly, and
wired to the terminal blocks or patch panels. Wires shall be tied into groups, in accordance with the order
of pairs as per color code, and corresponding to the relevant connection modules (or strips). Wiring to the
terminal blocks in MDF and network cabinets shall be performed by standard IDC connection tools.

2.10 INSPECTION AND TEST

A. Provide Commissioning verification, Inspection and Certification. Test requirements will include without being
limited to:
i. End-to-end testing for TP copper shall be conducted for 100% of pairs and
shall identify pair reversal, opens, shorts and resistance. The test results
shall be documented, corrections implemented and re-testing conducted and
documented. In addition documentation shall be presented to show the length
of the cable between the TC and theWA
ii. Attention testing for optical fiber shall be done after the fiber is installed.
iii. Optical time domain reflector-meter (OTDR) testing of all optical fiber
backbone cables is not required. However, if the optical fiber is suspected
by the Engineer in any network problems, then the Contractor shall provide,
OTDR testing during the troubleshooting process at the rate quoted in the
schedules.
iv. Verify labeling of all wiring.
v. Provide written verification conforming that the testing and inspection
has been completed and that all cable runs have passed. Also document that all
defects have been identified, corrected, and re-tested successfully.
vi. Final testing shall be carried out at practical completion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 A clearance of at least 20 cm must be respected between the low current cables and the power cables in all
the installation.

3.2 Each data cable should be one piece from each outlet to the corresponding network cabinet as shown on drawings.

3.3 All 4 pairs of each TP cable shall be terminated on a single port. The splitting of cable pairs between different jacks
is not permitted. Terminating resistors required in certain applications shall be placed externally to the outlets.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 11 00 - Page 5 of 6
 SECTION 27 11 00
TELEPHONE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

3.4 Terminating cable pairs (Category 6) shall have a maximum of 13 mm (1/2 inch) of cable untwisted
before termination.

3.5 One telephone cable, per network cabinet, with number of pairs as indicated on drawings will be used for the
connection of the network cabinet to the MDF. Main telephone feeder will run inside PVCduct and on cable trays
as shown on drawings.

3.6 All telephone and data cables will be installed on the same side inside the shaft and will be clearly labeled to
indicate the type and destination on each floor level.

3.7 In spaces with UTPI SCTP cable terminations, the maximum bend radius for 4 pair cable shall not exceed four
times the outside diameter of the cable and ten times for multi-pair cable This shall be done unless this violates
manufacturer specifications

3.8 During the actual installation, bend radius on 4-pair cable shall not exceed eight times the outside diameter of the
cable and ten times for multi-pair cable. This shall be done unles this violates manufacturer specifications.

3.9 In the telecommunications room/closet where cable trays or cable racking are used, the contractor shall provide
appropriate means of cable management such as reusable color-coded hook and loop cable managers (ties) to create a
neat appearance and practical installation.

3.10 In all outlets, a minimum slack of 30 cm should be left for UTP/ScTP, while 1 m to be left for fiber cables.

3.11 Tie wraps shall be used at appropriate intervals to secure cable and to provide strain relief at termination points.
These wraps shall not be over tightened to the point of deforming or
crimping the cable sheath.

3.12 Hook and loop cable managers should be used in the closet where reconfiguration of cables and terminations may be
frequent

3.13 Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 271100

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 11 00 - Page 6 of 6
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

SECTION 274133

CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work comprises one independent complete central antenna television (CATV) systems.
1. CATV system shall include the following:
 Satellite Dishes.
 VHF/UHF Antenna.
 Amplifiers.
 Cascade Multi switches.
 Terminal Switches.
 Satellite receivers.
 TV sets including remote control.

B. Systems/works are deemed to include all items of work needed for the project. Minor items, which not appear in the
specifications, which are necessary for normal operation of the system, are implied as ancillary and are deemed to have
been included.

C. System/work is deemed to include all items of work needed for the project. Minor items, which do not appear in the
Specifications and which are necessary for the normal operation of the system, are implied as ancillary equipment and
are deemed to have been included.

1.3 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 1 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

1.5 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CATV SYSTEMS

A. Components: modular plug-in, heavy-duty, industrial- or commercial-grade units.

B. Equipment: silicon-based, solid-state, integrated circuit devices.

C. Power Supply Characteristics: devices shall be within specified parameters for ac supply voltages of 240V, 50 Hz.

D. Protect signal cables and connected components against transient-voltage surges by suppressors and absorbers designed
specifically for the purpose.

E. RF and Video Impedance Matching: signal-handling components, including connecting cable, shall have end-to-end
impedance-matched signal paths. Match and balance devices used at connections where it is impossible to avoid
impedance mismatch or mismatch of balanced circuits to unbalanced circuits.

F. Description: signal-source components, signal-processing and amplifying equipment, distribution components, and
interconnecting wiring. System shall receive signals from sources, amplify and process them, and distribute them the
TV outlets.

G. CATV System Qualitative Performance Requirements: reception quality of color-television program transmissions at
each system outlet from each designated channel and source shall be equal to or superior than that obtained with perfor-
mance checks specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, using a standard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television
receiver. Signal requirements at any TV outlet shall meet the following performance: EARTH ELECTRODE
1. Level:
 At 40 to 862 MHz : 60 to 77 dB MV.
 Mono FM radio : 37 to 66 dB MV.
 Stereo FM radio : 47 to 66 dB MV
2. Maximum level difference:
 At 40 to 862 MHz : 15 dB

2.2 Earth electrode

A. Rods shall be 16 mm diameter extensible steel core copper jacketed type of 3.6m long in 1.2m sections with internal
bronze coupler and socket joints, driving head and connection clamp.

B. Steel core copper jacked rods shall have tensile strength of approximately 600 N/m Couplings for each section of the
rod shall be of same material of the rod, threaded to fit the rod sections.

C. Driving studs shall be used when driving the electrode into the ground.

D. Earth values shall be measured and recorded before coupling and driving in the next section.

E. Earth electrodes must penetrate to a minimum level of 2 meters below the summer water table of the site.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 2 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

F. Clamping of the earth leads to the earth rod shall be made by earth clamp.

G. The clamps shall be capable of providing a high pressure contact between the earth rod and the earth leads to achieve a
low contact resistance.

H. When two or more electrodes are driven to form a group, the heads of the electrodes in the group shall be bonded to
each other by means of a 25 mm x 3mm copper tape, laid at a depth of at least 600 mm in soil.

I. All earth electrode penetrations through basement water proofing membranes shall be provided with manufacturer’s
recommended water seal insert sleeve approved by Engineer.

J. The installation of the water seal insert sleeve shall be under the supervision and endorsed by the manufacturer’s
representative to ensure the installation comply with the manufacturer installation detail.

2.3 Cables Manufacturer

A. Technical specification of the material to be supplied including confirmation of the technical data provided in the
specification and a list of deviations therefrom.

B. Filling the technical data sheets including item breakdown as necessary. Fundamental design of installation.

C. Overall inspection and test program, inspection test and site test.

2.4 ANTENNAS

A. The antennas is to be robust and installed using the proper masts and foundations and shall be able to withstand wind
gusts at very high speed without causing them to deflect or turn away from their alignments setting.

B. FM/VHF/UHF Antennas:
1. The antennas are to be capable to receive the local TV channels and FM radio stations. Antennas shall be with
high gain and high front to back rations to ensure proper reception of the selected channels without interface.
2. The antenna is to be of the fixed type, mounted all on a common mast. Stacking distance between each antenna
and the other and supported by calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
3. The antennas are to be developed and constructed to ensure highest performance and shall have high mechanical
stability and include weather proof cable connection box.
4. The cable connection to include matching elements if necessary for 75 Ohms cables or symmetrical cable
connection

C. FM antenna is to have the following technical specifications:

 Number of elements : 3 minimum
 Gain : 5 dB
 Back to front ratio : 12 dB
 Half power band width : 70º horizontal, 63º vertical.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 3 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

D. VHF antenna is to have the following technical specifications:

 Gain : 10 dB
 Back to front ratio : 20 dB
 Half power band width : 49º horizontal, 57º

E. UHF antenna is to have the following technical specifications:

 Gain : 15 dB
 Back to front ratio : 28 dB
 Half power band width : 35º horizontal, 42º vertical.

2.5 THE SATELLITE ANTENNAS

A. The satellite antennas (Dishes) are dedicated for Satellite TV channels reception. They shall be robust and have enough
mechanical stability to withstand high velocity wind gusts up to very high without causing them to turn or defect away
from their alignment setting.

B. They are to be mounted on the proper mount anchored to the floor by special suitable anchorage system.

C. The size of the dish diameter is to be suitable to receive the desired channels with- out distortion or interface and of 2.4-
meter diameter.

D. The proper LNB is to be installed and shall be selected of high quality, and includes all the necessary elements for
horizontal or vertical polarized signals as necessary for the corresponding channels reception.

E. The dishes and the LNBs are to be of the fixed non-motorized types.

F. Satellite antenna is to have the following technical specifications:

 Reflector diameter : 2.4 meter
 Gain : 45 dB
 Frequency band : C band 3.7 to 5 GHz and KU band 10.7 to 12.75 GHz
 Half-power beam width : 0.8º.

2.6 MULTI-SWITCH UNITS

A. The Social building TV & Satellite Reception System shall utilize cascadable multi-switches (Active / Passive) with 13
SAT. IF inputs, one RF Input and 9 sub- scriber outputs with 35 dB isolation from LNB to LNB and 28 dB cross
polarization isolation.

B. The contractor / system supplier shall provide detailed Signal Strength calculation and include all needed IF / RF
amplifiers to obtain the Signal Strength as de- scribed above.

2.7 TV SIGNAL PROCESSORS

A. The television signal processor takes the off-air TV channel signal coming from the amplifies, filters, and stabilizes for
distribution over the network.

B. The signal processor is also to convert the input channel to any output channel in the VHF, or UHF bands.

C. It is to include among others, front panel output level control, RF input and output level controls.

D. The signal processor is to have the following technical specifications:

 Video band width : 20 Hz – 5 MHz
 Audio band width : 40 Hz – 15 kHz

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 4 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

 Input level : 1 V / Hz (video) 0 dBm / 600 Hz (audio)

 Output level, 1 dB-steps : 74 dB uv to 84 dB uv
 Screening factor : 75 dB at 450 MHz 75 dB at 950 MHz

2.8 TRUNK/DISTRIBUTION AMPLIFIERS

A. Amplify the signal coming from the combiner. Trunk/distribution amplifier is to be a broad band amplifier with 35 dB
gain. It shall have a low noise figure.

B. It is to be suitable for indoor and outdoor use in cabinets and pedestals. It is to include built-in attenuators, and output
level control.

C. It is to be suitable for operation in the VHF band and UHF band.

D. Output level to be 120 dBu V or more.

E. The amplifier is to have the following technical specifications:

 Frequency range : 47 to 862 MHz 4 to 30 MHz return path
 Gain : average 35 dB at 47 to 862 MHz -1 dB at return path
 Amplitude response :  1 dB
 Equalizer : 0 to 10 dB
 Attenuator : 2 to 10 dB
 Noise figure : 6 dB
 Return loss input/output s : >20 dB
 Power : 220 V, 50 Hz
 .

2.9 TV OUTLETS:

A. TV OUTLETS: single-outlet wall socket, resistive type with covering plate compatible with wall finishes and other
electrical outlets/switches described in Section 16143 of the Specification

B. Outlets are to have the following technical specifications:

 Frequency range : 47 to 862 MHz
 All socket to be end sockets
 Side loss : 15dB
 Screening factor : >65 dB

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 5 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other elements for compliance with
space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for antenna to verify actual locations of cable connections before antenna installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, equipment bases, and roof supports for suitable conditions where television equipment is
to be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Outdoor Installation: comply with ANSI C2, “National Electrical Safety Code."

B. Install surge suppressors where ac-power-operated devices are not protected against voltage transients by integral surge
suppressors. Install surge suppressors at the devices' power-line terminals. Comply with Division 16 Section
"Transient Voltage Suppression."

C. Support and anchor antenna towers, masts, and mountings.

1. Concrete Foundations: reinforced concrete complying with "Cast-in- Place Concrete."
2. Steel Anchorage Components: galvanized-steel shapes and plates complying with "Structural Steel."

D. Wiring Method: install cables in raceways. In plenum area, cable shall be installed in EMT conduits. Exposed Cable:
Install parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and support the cable according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not run adjacent and parallel to power or data cables.

E. Pulling Cable: do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored,
deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard
cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.

F. Equalizing Video Signals: where system performance may be degraded in certain operating modes, revise component
connections and install video distribution amplifiers and attenuators as required to provide a balanced signal across the
system.

G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: for power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and
outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals ac- cording to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values

H. Grounding: provide independent signal circuit grounding recommended by manufacturer.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 6 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

3.3 CATV SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install the Building Television and satellite system equipment, including associated control devices as indicated, in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of applicable standards, and in accordance with
recognized code of practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and services intended function.

B. CATV Antennas: align antenna elements to achieve maximum signal level and quality.

C. CATV Antenna-Supporting Structure: increase antenna height as required to obtain signal strength needed for
specified system performance.

D. Antenna Cable Entrance: use entrance fittings and seal and waterproof penetrations of the building envelope.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspection: verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified.

B. Pretesting: align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with
specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items. Retest until satisfactory performance and
conditions are achieved. Prepare television equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:
1. Off-Air, Mast-Mounted Antenna Sources: connect the receiver to the down lead of a 10- element, single-channel
antenna, tuned and oriented to optimize reception for the channel and placed at the system antenna's location.
Alternatively, connect the receiver to a single- channel video amplifier connected to the down lead of the above
single-channel antenna.

2. Satellite Earth-Station System Sources: adapt the receiver to the out- put of the satellite-TV receiver.

C. Test Schedule: schedule tests after pretesting has successfully been completed and system has been in normal
functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule.

D. Operational Tests: perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all
modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.

E. CATV System Acceptance Tests: include the following, performed ac- cording to NCTA-02:
1. Instrumentation: use a field-strength meter rated for minus 40-dB mV measuring sensitivity and a frequency
range of 54 to 812 MHz, mini- mum. Provide documentation of recent calibration against recognized standards.

2. Signal Level: use a field-strength meter to measure signal levels at CATV system outlets. Readings on each of
the channels designated to be received must be within specified limits.

3. Signal-to-Noise-Ratio Test: use a field-strength meter to make a sequence of measurements at the output of the
last distribution amplifier or of another agreed-upon location in system. With system operating at normal levels,
tune meter to the picture carrier frequency of each of the designated channels in turn and record the level. With
signal re- moved and input to corresponding head-end amplifier terminated at

4. 75 ohms, measure the level of noise at the same tuning settings. With meter correction factor added to last
readings, differences from first set must not be less than 45 dB.

5. Picture-Quality Test: connect a standard TV receiver to each system outlet and observe picture quality on
designated channels. No evidence of cross-channel intermodulation, ghost images, or beat interference should
appear.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 7 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

F. Qualitative and Quantitative Performance Tests: demonstrate reception quality of color-television program
transmissions at each system outlet from each designated channel and source. Quality shall be equal to or superior than
that obtained with performance checks specified below, using a stan- dard, commercial, cable-ready, color-television
receiver.
1. RF Video Carrier Level: between 3- and 12-dB mV.
2. Relative Video Carrier Level: within 3 dB to adjacent channel.
3. Carrier Level Stability, Short Term: level does not change more than0.5 dB during a 60-minute period.
4. Carrier Level Stability, Long Term: level does not change more than 2 dB during a 24-hour period.
5. Broadband Frequency Response: more than the 54- to 220-MHz frequency range, signal amplitude is plus or
minus 3 dB, maximum.
6. Channel Frequency Response: across any 6-MHz channel in the 54- to 220-MHz frequency range, referenced to
video carrier, signal amplitude is plus or minus 1 dB, maximum, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Carrier-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB or more, unless otherwise indicated.
8. RF Visual Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 43 dB or more.
9. Cross Modulation: less than minus 50 dB.
10. Terminal Isolation TV to TV: 25 dB, minimum.
11. Terminal Isolation between TV and FM: 35 dB, minimum.
12. Hum Modulation: 2 percent, maximum.
13. RF FM Carrier Level: 13 to 17 dB below video carrier level.
14. FM Frequency Response: more than the 88- to 108-MHz frequency range, signal amplitude is plus or minus
0.75 dB, maximum.

G. Record test results.

H. Retest: correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Clean CATV system components, including antennas and supports, multi switches, distribution components, and
outlets.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and
maintain television equipment.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for troubleshooting, servicing, and
maintaining equipment.
2. Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of components and settings for system
controls.
3. Demonstrate programming and tuning of satellite receivers.
4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
5. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance notice.
6. Conduct a minimum of six hours' training as specified in instructions to Owner's employees in Division 1
Section "Contract Closeout."

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 8 of 9
 SECTION 27 41 33
CENTRAL ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM

3.7 CERTIFICATES AND TESTING

A. The complete installation shall be tested and inspected to ensure that it complies with the requirements of this
Specification, the IEE Wiring Regulations, British Standards and Local Electricity authority.

B. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations and to the satisfaction of the Local
Electricity authority.

3.8 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: when requested by Owner within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site
assistance in tuning and adjusting the system to suit actual occupied conditions and to optimize performance. Provide
up to two adjustments at Project site for this purpose, without additional cost.

END OF SECTION 274133

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 41 33 - Page 9 of 9
 SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

SECTION 275116

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. This section includes independent public address (PA) system provided for background music in public areas, offices,
and lobby and other areas as shown on drawings. PA sound system is to include, but not limited to, the following:

1. DVD player

2. Power mixer Amplifiers.

3. Cabinets and racks

4. Volume controls

5. Speakers.

6. Wiring.

B. System/work is deemed to include all items of work needed for the project. Minor items, which do not appear in the
specification and which are necessary for normal operation of the system, are implied as ancillary equipment and are
deemed to have been indicated.

1.3 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s data and installation for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant international testing
authorities.

B. Manufacturer firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Manufactures shall be certified to
ISO 9000 or equivalent.

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 27 51 16
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 1 of 6
 SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

C. Mixing of major components from different manufacturer, to make one system, shall not be permitted. All components
shall by supplied from a single source/manufacturer.

1.5 GURANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall submit the guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship.

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturers and dealers standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: the public address (PA) systems provided for background music shall be a complete system for amplifying
input sound signals MP3 and DVD players and distributing them to loudspeakers at various locations. Live paging /
announcement is to be broadcasted through PA system and to have the highest priority.

B. System shall permit announcement on individual zones, any combination of zones and simultaneous announcements on
all zones

C. Functional Performance: components and system features and functions are to include, but are not limited to, the
following:

1. Multiple Sources: switch select ability of sources for sound amplification between the various inputs:
MP3 and DVD player in case of background music broadcasting live messages from microphones are to be provided.

2. High-Quality Sound Reproduction: freedom from noises such as pops, clicks, hiss and hum at all loudspeakers at all
times during operation.

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. General: provide equipment using all solid-state components fully rated for continuous duty at the ratings indicated or
specified. Select equipment for normal operation on input power supplied at 240V, 50Hz

B. Power Amplifiers: provide the following features and characteristics:

1. master module amplifiers shall incorporate a master volume control, a sliding control for both tribble and bass,
a built-in limiter plus and LED indicator and headphone socket to permit input signal monitoring

2. amplifiers shall incorporate a push button ON/OFF switch with indicator lamps to define unit status

3. mounting : 19” rack mounted

4. output voltage : 100V,70V,50V

5. Harmonic Distortion : @ 1 kHZ < 0.5 THD

6. Frequency response : 60 HZ to 16 kHZ

7. Output power rating to be as shown on drawings.

8. Control to be ON/OFF, input levels , low cut filter

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 27 51 16
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 2 of 6
 SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

C. DVD PLAYER
Type: rack mounted, high quality, DVD playback type with 5-disk cartridge standard, single beam laser
assembly and auto playback programed facilities. DVD player is to have pre-amplifier if necessary.

Characteristics minimum requirements are to be as follows

Playback system DVD disk
frequency range 2 Hz - 20 kHz
signal-to-noise ratio not less than 97 dB
T.H.D. Not greater than 0.008% (1 kHz)
Out-band rejection not less than 56 dB
Max. Audio line out 2 V (rms)
min. load impedance 10k ohm
power supply 220 V, 50 Hz

D. WIRING:

wiring and cables are to be in conduits and raceways complying and in accordance with section (260533) of the
specification.
1. Mains wiring: equipment is to operate from 220V, 50 Hz mains and is to be capable of continuous
operation under any load conditions with variations of +/-10% or nominal voltage. Mains wiring
inside cabinets and racks are to be totally segregated from low – level signal wiring.
2. Low – Level Signal Wiring: heavily braided, PE insulated, screened cable, PVC sheathed with
standard DIN plug connecting.
3. Wiring and cables for speakers: rated for 600 volt (maximum) operating voltage, finely standard
tinned copper, 1.5mm diameter (minimum), polyethylene insulated, twisted pair and aluminized
polyester shield, standard tinned drain wire, PVC overheated. Maximum loss in speaker 7 due cable
is 0.5 dB

E. RACKS AND CABINETS:

1. Racks are to contain MP3 player, DVD player power supply module, monitor unit, power amplifier
and output terminal module. Racks are to be 19-inch standard frame racks, with drawable and
hinged. Equipment is to be mounted and designed for 19-inch rack mounting.

2. Cabinets are to be 19-inch frame, totally enclosed with side and rear panels removable, and cable
entrance at rear, top or bottom. Surface finish is to be textured and of approved color. Frames are to
be anodized aluminum sections. Each frame is to be provided with ventilation rack, including
automatically operated fan with thermostatic control. Suitable ventilation openings are to be
provided. Enclosure is to be IP 42 to IEC 144 for indoor installation.

F. LOUDSPEAKER:
1. Ceiling Loudspeakers

A. the ceiling loudspeakers shall be suitable for false-ceiling mounting, and shall be
specially designed for background music and public address applications. They shall be
installed as specified and shown on the drawings.

b. The ceiling loudspeakers shall high quality cone type and fitted with front metal grille and
circular baffle plate for mounting in a suspended ceiling. A sample of the loudspeaker shall be
submitted to the engineer for approval.
WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 27 51 16
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 3 of 6
 SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

c. The ceiling loudspeakers shall be provided complete with 100V line matching transformer, with
maximum insertion loss not greater than 0.5 dB over the frequency range 150-15000 Hz.

d. The ceiling loudspeakers shall be fitted with rear fire-dome.

e. The ceiling loudspeakers shall provide the following minimum performance:

i) frequency response 150Hz – 15Hz -3dB
ii) Characteristic sensitivity level (SPL @ 1m on axis for 1W rms input) > 90dB
iii) Input voltage: 100V
iv) Rated power input 6watt rams (with tapping 1.5, 3 & 6 watt)
v) Minimum coverage angle (included angle between –6dB
Points on- axis level 90º @ 1 KHz

2. Wall speaker

a. these speakers shall be provided with a resonating board and an aluminum grille for universal application
for flush or surface-mounted enclosures. The speaker shall be a high performance type and shall be
provided with auto-transformer with taps for 1/4, 1/2 and 1/1 output. The normal rated capacity shall be 6
W, if not otherwise specified in the Project Documentation. A volume control shall be incorporated. The
sound pressure shall be approximately 100 dB

G. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
External loudspeakers shall be weatherproof, with ingress protection meeting at least IP54 in accordance with
BS EN 60529 (IEC 529).
AS far as is practicable, all loudspeakers shall be fire resistant, either by inherent construction or by fire-
resistant enclosure. The design and installation shall provide the maximum practicable protection of the
loudspeaker line during a fire. All loudspeaker enclosures shall be fitted with twin threaded inserts to
accommodate 20mm glands for direct entry and exit of mineral-insulated copper sheathed cables complying
with BS 6207. Any loudspeaker types for which this requirement cannot be met shall be clearly identified
within the tender.
The colors and finishes of all loudspeakers shall be approved by the consultant.

H. Loudspeaker Interconnections
All loudspeakers shall be supplied with high quality audio transformers. The transformers shall have
a minimum of 3 secondary tapings, with a ratio of at least 4:1 between the highest and the lowest
tapings (6dB power factor).
Any revision of the loudspeaker layout shall be subject to approval by the consultant.

G. Volume Controls
1)the volume controls are intended for use in combination with loudspeaker lines.
2)For volume control of groups of loudspeaker in the public areas, the power handing capacity of the volume control
must be chosen in accordance with the power and number of the loudspeakers in the group.
3)Volume control may be achieved in seven steps with a switch corresponding 0, -3, -6, -9, -12, -18 dB and off.
Provisions should be to allow emergency spoken announcement always at full volume regardless of the position of
the volume control.
4)Volume control shall be recessed type and fitted with a priority override relay.

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 27 51 16
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 4 of 6
 SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

A. Examine conditions, with the installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the
performance of the PA and separate sound system work.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: install system in accordance with applicable requirements. Install equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Wiring methods use special cables in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal wiring.
Raceways are deemed to be included whether shown or not.

C. Impedance and Level Matching: carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels
at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

D. Control circuit wiring provide number of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide
control functions indicated or specified.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings so designed and installed
as not to damage the cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 1 meter and not more than 15 cm from
every cabinet, box, or fitting.

F. Wiring within enclosures: provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.

G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures.

H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking
tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in co-ordination with system wiring diagrams.

3.3 GROUNDING
A. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest
extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Protesting: upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform
complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of
the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or
damaged items with new, and retest until materials satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

B. Testing: upon completion of retesting, notify the Architect a minimum of 10 days in advance of acceptance
test performance. Schedule and conduct tests in his presence. Provide a written record of tests results.

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 27 51 16
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 5 of 6
 SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

C. Operational Test: perform an operational system test to verify conformance of system to these
Specifications. Perform tests that include originating program and page material at microphone outlets, all
preamplifier program inputs, and all other inputs. Observe sound reproduction for proper volume levels and
freedom from noise.

D. Signal-To-Noise Ratio Test: measure the ratio of signal to noise of the complete system at normal gain
settings using the following procedure:

E. Inspection: make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labelled, and interconnecting
wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings of speaker line matching transformers.

F. Retesting: rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at
Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies
with applicable standards. Provide a written record of all retest results.

3.5 TRAINING

A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum of three hours
training.

B. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days advance notice

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration.

3.7 CERTIFICATES AND TESTING

The complete installation shall be tested and inspected to ensure that it complies with the requirements of this
Specification, the IEE Wiring Regulations, British Standards and Local Electricity authority. The tests shall be carried
out in accordance with the IEE Wiring Regulations and to the satisfaction of the Local Electricity authority.

END OF SECTION 275116

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 27 51 16
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 6 of 6
 SECTION 27 51 23
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

SECTION 275123

INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. This specification and the associated drawings describe the requirements for Intercom System. The Construction
Drawings are diagrammatic; they are intended to show the basic system components and the overall scheme of
operation. They are not intended to shall all system components. The contractor shall provide all equipment, materials,
devices, conduit, circuit breakers, fuses, circuitry, etc. for a complete and operable system.

B. The intercom system shall be equipped with all necessary components.

C. The Master Intercom Station in the Main Reception Area

1.3 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s data and installation for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant international testing
authorities.

B. Manufacturer firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Manufactures shall be certified to
ISO9000 or equivalent.

C. Mixing of major components from different manufacturer, to make one system, shall not be permitted. All components
shall by supplied from a single source/manufacturer.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 51 23 - Page 1 of 7
 SECTION 27 51 23
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

1.5 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall submit the guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship.

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturers and dealers standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF MANUALLY SWITCHED SYSTEMS

1. Master Station:
a. Communicating selectively with other master and speaker-microphone stations by actuating selector
switches.
b. Communicating simultaneously with all other stations by actuating a single all-call switch.
c. Communicating with individual stations in privacy.
d. Including other master-station connections in a multiple-station conference call.
e. Accessing separate paging speakers or groups of paging speakers by actuating selector switches.
f. Overriding any conversation by a designated master station.

2. Speaker-Microphone Station:
a. Having privacy from remote monitoring without a warning tone signal at monitored station. Designated
speaker-microphone stations have a privacy switch to prevent another station from listening and to
permit incoming calls.
b. Communicating hands free.
c. Calling master station by actuating call switch.
d. Returning a busy signal to indicate that station is already in use.
e. Being free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.
3. Speakers: Free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.

B. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF MICROPROCESSOR-SWITCHED SYSTEMS

1. Master Station:
a. Communicating selectively with other master and speaker-microphone stations by dialing station's
number on a 12-digit keypad.
b. Communicating simultaneously with all other stations by dialing a designated number on a 12-digit
keypad.
c. Communicating with individual stations in privacy.
d. Including other master-station connections in a multiple-station conference call.
e. Accessing separate paging speakers or groups of paging speakers by dialing designated numbers on a 12-
digit keypad.
f. Overriding any conversation by a designated master station.
g. Displaying selected station.
2. Speaker-Microphone Station:
a. Having privacy from remote monitoring without a warning tone signal at monitored station. Designated
speaker-microphone stations have a privacy switch to prevent another station from listening and to
permit incoming calls.
b. Communicating hands free.
c. Calling master station by actuating call switch.
d. Returning a busy signal to indicate that station is already in use.
e. Being free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.
3. Speakers: Free of noise and distortion during operation and when in standby mode.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 51 23 - Page 2 of 7
 SECTION 27 51 23
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. GENERAL
1. Coordinate features and select components to form an integrated system. Match components and
interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
2. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty unless otherwise
indicated. Select equipment for normal operation on input power usually supplied at 110 to 130 V, 60 Hz.
3. Weather-Resistant Equipment: Listed and labeled by an NRTL for duty outdoors or in damp locations.

B. MASTER STATION FOR MANUALLY SWITCHED SYSTEMS

1. Station-Selector and Talk-Listen Switches: Heavy-duty type with gold-plated contacts rated for five million
operations.
2. Volume Control: Regulates incoming-call volume.
3. LED Annunciation: Identifies calling stations and stations in use. LED remains on until call is answered.
4. Tone Annunciation: Momentary audible tone signal announces incoming calls.
5. Speaker Microphone: Transmits and receives calls.
6. Handset with Hook Switch: Telephone type with 450-mm long, permanently coiled cord. Arrange to disconnect
speaker when handset is lifted.
7. Equipment Cabinet: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D. Lockable, ventilated metal cabinet houses terminal strips,
power supplies, amplifiers, system volume control, and auxiliary equipment.

C. MASTER STATION FOR MICROPROCESSOR-SWITCHED SYSTEMS

1. 12-Digit Keypad Selector: Transmits calls to other stations and initiates commands for programming and
operation.
2. Volume Control: Regulates incoming-call volume.
3. LED Annunciation: Identifies calling stations and stations in use. LED remains on until call is answered.
4. Tone Annunciation: Momentary audible tone signal announces incoming calls.
5. Handset with Hook Switch: Telephone type with 450-mm long, permanently coiled cord. Arrange to disconnect
speaker when handset is lifted.
6. Reset Control: Cancels call and resets system for next call.
7. Equipment Cabinet: Comply with TIA/EIA-310-D. Lockable, ventilated metal cabinet houses terminal strips,
power supplies, amplifiers, system volume control, and other switching and control devices required for
conversation channels and control functions.

D. SPEAKER-MICROPHONE STATIONS
1. Mounting: Flush unless otherwise indicated, and suitable for mounting conditions indicated.
2. Faceplate: Stainless steel or anodized aluminum with tamperproof mounting screws.
3. Back Box: Two-gang galvanized steel with 64-mm minimum depth.
4. Speaker: 76 mm, 65 g minimum; permanent magnet.
5. Tone Annunciation: Recurring momentary tone indicates incoming calls.
6. Call Switch: Mount on faceplate. Permits calls to master station.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 51 23 - Page 3 of 7
 SECTION 27 51 23
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

7. Privacy Switch: Mount on faceplate. When in on position, switch prevents transmission of sound from remote
station to system; when in off position, without further switch manipulation, response can be made to incoming
calls.
8. Handset with Hook Switch: Telephone type with 450-mm long, permanently coiled cord. Arrange to disconnect
speaker when handset is lifted.

E. CALL-SWITCH UNIT
1. Enclosure: Single-gang box with stainless-steel faceplate.
2. Call Switch: Momentary contact signals system that a call has been placed.
3. Privacy Switch: Prevents transmission of sound signals from station to system.
4. Volume Control: Operated by screwdriver blade through a hole in faceplate to adjust output level of associated
speaker.
5. Handset with Hook Switch: Telephone type with 450-mm long, permanently coiled cord. Arrange to disconnect
speaker when handset is lifted.

F. ALL-CALL AMPLIFIER
1. Output Power: 70-V balanced line, 80 percent of the sum of wattage settings of connected for each station and
speaker connected in all-call mode of operation, plus an allowance for future stations.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 5 percent at rated output power with load equivalent to quantity of stations
connected in all-call mode of operation.
3. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB, at rated output.
4. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 70 to 12,000 Hz.
5. Output Regulation: Maintains output level within 2 dB from full to no load.
6. Input Sensitivity: Compatible with master stations and central equipment so amplifier delivers full-rated output
with sound-pressure level of less than 10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on master stations, speaker microphones, or
handset transmitters.
7. Amplifier Protection: Prevents damage from shorted or open output.

G. INTERCOMMUNICATION AMPLIFIER
1. Minimum Output Power: 2 W; adequate for all functions.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 5 percent at rated output power with load equivalent to one station
connected to output terminals.
3. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 45 dB, at rated output.
4. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 70 to 10,000 Hz.
5. Output Regulation: Maintains output level within 2 dB from full to no load.
6. Input Sensitivity: Matched to input circuit and to provide full-rated output with sound-pressure level of less than
10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on master stations, speaker microphones, or handset transmitters.
7. Amplifier Protection: Prevents damage from shorted or open output.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 51 23 - Page 4 of 7
 SECTION 27 51 23
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

H. PAGING AMPLIFIER
1. Input Voltage: 240-V ac, 50 Hz.
2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 60 to 10,000 Hz.
3. Minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 60 dB, at rated output.
4. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 3 percent at rated power output from 70 to 12,000 Hz.
5. Output Regulation: Less than 2 dB from full to no load.
6. Controls: On-off, input levels, and low-cut filter.
7. Input Sensitivity: Matched to input circuit and to provide full-rated output with sound-pressure level of less than
10 dynes/sq. cm impinging on speaker microphones or handset transmitters.
8. Amplifier Protection: Prevents damage from shorted or open output.
9. Output Circuit: 70-V line.

I. CONE-TYPE LOUDSPEAKERS/SPEAKER MICROPHONES

1. Minimum Axial Sensitivity: 91 dB at one meter, with 1-W input.
2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 70 to 15,000 Hz.
3. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 100 degrees.
4. Line Transformer: Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB, power rating equal to speaker's, and at least four level
taps.
5. Enclosures: Steel housings or back boxes, acoustically dampened, with front face of at least 1.2-mm steel and
whole assembly rust proofed and factory primed; complete with mounting assembly and suitable for surface
ceiling, flush ceiling, pendant or wall mounting; with relief of back pressure.

J. HORN-TYPE LOUDSPEAKERS/SPEAKER MICROPHONES

1. Speakers shall be all-metal, weatherproof construction; complete with universal mounting brackets.
2. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 275 to 14,000 Hz.
3. Minimum Power Rating of Driver: 15 W, continuous.
4. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 110 degrees.
5. Line Transformer: Maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB, power rating equal to speaker's, and at least four level
taps.

K. HORN-TYPE EXPLOSION-PROOF LOUDSPEAKERS

1. Speakers shall be all-metal construction; complete with universal mounting brackets.
2. Units in Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Listed and labeled for environment in which they are located.
3. Frequency Response: Within plus or minus 3 dB from 300 to 12,000 Hz.
4. Minimum Power Rating of Driver: 30,60 W, continuous.
5. Minimum Dispersion Angle: 95, 60 by 120 degrees.
6. Line Transformer: Internally mounted and factory installed, power rating equal to speaker's, and at least four
level taps.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 51 23 - Page 5 of 7
 SECTION 27 51 23
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

L. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

1. Conductors: Jacketed, twisted pair and twisted multipair, untinned solid copper. Sizes as recommended by
system manufacturer, but no smaller than No. 22 AWG.
2. Insulation: Thermoplastic, not less than 0.8 mm thick.
3. Shielding: For speaker-microphone leads and elsewhere where recommended by manufacturer; No. 34 AWG,
tinned, soft-copper strands formed into a braid or equivalent foil.
4. Minimum Shielding Coverage on Conductors: 60 percent.
5. Plenum Cable: Listed and labeled for plenum installation.

M. RACEWAYS
1. Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Section 260533
"Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
2. Intercommunication and Program System Raceways and Boxes: Same as required for electrical branch circuits
specified in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
3. Outlet boxes shall be not less Retain paragraph below to prohibit use of flexible metal conduit.
4. Flexible metal conduit is prohibited.

PART 3 - EXAMINATION

3.1 Examination

A. Examine conditions, with the installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the
performance of the intercommunication system.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: install system in accordance with applicable requirements. Install equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Wiring methods use special cables in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal wiring. Raceways
are deemed to be included whether shown or not.

C. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

D. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate
wires and cables so they identify media in coordination with system wiring diagrams.

E. Weatherproof Equipment: For units that are mounted outdoors, in damp locations, or where exposed to weather, install
consistent with requirements of weatherproof rating.

F. Speaker-Line Matching Transformer Connections: Make initial connections using tap settings indicated on Drawings.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 51 23 - Page 6 of 7
 SECTION 27 51 23
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns,
noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components,
assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
Prepare a list of final tap settings of paging speaker-line matching transformers.

E. Intercommunications and program systems will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 TRAINING

A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the intercommunications and program systems.
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on programming equipment for starting up and shutting down,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining the system and equipment.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration.

3.7. Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 275123

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 27 51 23 - Page 7 of 7
 SECTION 28 13 00
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 281300

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

1.0 SUMMARY

A. This section is to be read in conjunction with relevant items of all sections and drawings issued for this proposed
works.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.1 PART-1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

D. Installer Qualifications: Must have on staff a registered communication distribution designer certified by Building
Industry Consulting Service International.

E. Quality Standards: SIA DC-01 and SIA DC-03.

2.1 PART-2 DESCRIPTION

F. Security Access System: standalone system for IT and control rooms

3.1 PART-3 OPERATION

G. Single database for access-control and credential-creation functions.

H. Distributed processing.

I. Field Equipment: Controllers, sensors, and controls.

J. System Response to Alarms: One second(s) or less.

K. False-alarm reduction.

L. Error detection.

4.1 PART-4 HARDWARE

M. Surge and tamper protection.

N. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit.

O. Secondary alarm annunciator.

P. Card Readers: Visible and audible status indications and user prompts.

1. Stripe Swipe Readers: ABA Track.

2. Wiegand Swipe Reader: Set up for 33-bit data cards. Comply with SIA AC-01.
3. Wiegand Key-Insert Reader: Set up for 33-bit data cards.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 13 00 - Page 1 of 2
 SECTION 28 13 00
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

4. Bar-Code Reader: Set up for Code 39.

5. Insert readers.
6. Touch-plate and proximity readers.
7. Keypad and Wiegand-swipe-reader combination.

Q. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons.

R. Door and Gate Hardware Interface:

1. Exit device with alarm.

2. Exit alarm.
3. Electric door strikes.
4. Electromagnetic locks.
5. Vehicle gate operator.

S. Cables: NFPA 70, Types CM, CMP, CMG, and CMR; multiconductor, jacketed.

4.2 INSTALLATION

T. Wiring Method: In raceway and cable tray within cabinets and in accessible ceiling spaces and gypsum board
partitions.

4.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

U. Testing Agency: Contractor engaged.

V. Test Procedure: TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

4.6 STARTUP SERVICE

4.6.1.1.1 Owner's operators, management, and security personnel enrolled and badges and access cards prepared.

4.6.1.2 MANUFACTURERS:

4.6.1.2.1 Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 281300

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 13 00 - Page 2 of 2
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

IP CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

SECTION 282100

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.
B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and MOI regulation and in case of conflict between
contract documents, and the standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.
C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services, hardware, software, tests and operation
and maintenance documentation necessary to complete and make ready for operation, a complete IP based Closed
Circuit Television system for the building in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
B. The CCTV Systems shall be an IP based system utilizing Network cameras directly connected to Local Area
Network (LAN). The IP CCTV System shall be capable of monitoring, controlling and Image storing for cameras
located at different areas.
C. Contractor shall provide full support to the Network Active Equipment for proper selection of the Network Active
Equipment to ensure proper installation & operation of the IP-CCTV Systems.

1.3 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s data and installation for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer,
for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project, to supervise installation of the system. An
experienced installer certified By MOI.
B. Standards: System is to be in accordance to CCIR and/or EIA standards or other equal and MOI approved standards.
C. The IP CCTV System's equipment shall be installed by a factory owned office that is also ISO 9001/ISO 9002 certified
or an authorized distributor or installer of the manufacturer. The installer shall have an existing certification from MOI-
SSD. Any other installers will not be acceptable bidders for this project.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 1 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

D. Mixing of major components from different manufacturer, to make one system, shall not be permitted. All components
shall by supplied from a single source/manufacturer.

1.5 GURANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall submit the guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship.
B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturers and dealers standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SECURITY SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

(Reproduced from MOI Regulations)

A. The proposed security surveillance system must be an open standard based on internet protocol (IP) network system.
B. System must contain a program capable of simultaneous recording, playback, storage, copying and remote access
without any adverse effect On any of the function Management software should provide cam number, location,
date & time of recording generated by system server, forced masking (password protected) in recorded video and
alarm management images recording and storage system's performance must be checked daily.
C. Cameras used in the system must be vandal proof, tamperproof weatherproof and day/night according to the
environmental requirements.
D. Cameras must be suitable for operation under extreme temperature, relative humidity and non-condensing.
E. Cameras used in the system must cover the required field of view and its details day and night. Panoramic coverage
through PTZ or multi-lens megapixel cameras is a must wherever required.
F. System must have sufficient storage system for all camera recordings for a period of 120 days, in MPEG-4 or H.264
format or better quality compression techniques. the recording frame rate and resolution must be programmable from
the user level. it should give the ability to customize also quality of the video output based on the viewing needs and
storing capacity.
G. The minimum recommended camera resolution is MEGAPIXEL.
H. cameras used in the system for outdoor and indoor specific areas must have Auto-iris, Auto-ICR, auto-exposure,
backlight compensation, wide dynamic range, contrast enhancement, digital noise reduction, digital image
stabilization, privacy masking, motion detection, digital/optical zoom, multiple gain control, white balance, Intelligent
Video Analytics, Audio I/O, VPS/Interlaced scanning features.
I. Sufficient lighting arrangement must be provided for the cameras according to the location and requirement.
J. Sufficient lighting should be provided in the sites of long-range vision to cover the area of surveillance.
K. High quality infrared camera must be used in full dark areas.
L. The camera representation of the object for monitoring should be as follows :
a-for identification purposes - the figure should cover at least 120%of the screen height

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 2 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

b-for recognition purposes - the figure should cover at least 50%of the screen height
c-for detection purposes - the figure should cover at least 10%of the screen height
d-for monitoring purposes - the figure should cover at least 5% of the screen height
M. For number plate recognition, the recommended screen image representation must be at least 50% of the screen height.
N. A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera displays at any one time in a standard 32" wall
screen At any given circumstances, the number of cameras per display screen will depend primarily as the size of the
screen. A separate viewing displays or area may also be required for reviewing recorded video
O. A single CCTV operator should monitor no more than nine (9) camera displays at any one time in a standard 23"
desktop screen.
P. Local area network (LAN) infrastructure must be highly available, reliable, secured and able to support a growing
number of CCTV devices in the network. infrastructure cabling must be of the latest specifications and quality.
Q. Infrastructure must be concealed and protected by industrial standard weatherproofing, anti- tamper and anti-RFI
material.
R. CCTV system must be an integral part of the whole IP based network infrastructure system.
S. The network infrastructure should be able to carry a high quality, high resolution, real time video in a converged
voice/video and data network.
T. Remote wide area network (WAN) connectivity must be secured with the latest encryption/decryption techniques to
preserve the authenticity without compromising the good quality video transmission over the network.
U. The system must also support NTP (network time protocol) to synchronize the system time of the video to a reference
time for time stamping
V. Camera numbering and location details in display and recording must be according to site and location to easily
distinguish captured scenes
W. System must have full function control unit (joystick control unit and touch screen feature if its available) including
keyboard and mouse facility to use with

X. The system should ensure that the image and video being produced is tamperproof and cannot be altered. the recording
shall have an audit trail feature.
Y. System administration must contain different levels of user privileges and roles in accordance with the users'
responsibilities.
Z. The system must contain search feature of the material recorded by the number/name of camera, location, and time and
date.
AA. The system must have the ability of long term storing on external storage devices as well as copying on different
external media.
BB. The system should also allow for backup of specific data on any drives like CD/DVD/BLU RAY recorders or any other
device In a format which can be replayed through a standard pc based software.
Log of any such activity should be maintained by the system which can be audited at a later date.
CC. The recorded video should be exported in its native file format (i.e. without converting between formats) to maintain
Image quality and no additional compression should be applied during the export process.
DD. The system must have a UPS backup power to run the whole system for not less than one hour in case of power failure.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 3 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

EE. The system must have a hot standby system with automatic changeover in case of any fatal failure in the active system.

FF. The system must have a corrective and preventive maintenance contract or periodical Service Level Agreement (SLA)
for its operational life which includes but not limited to the following:

 Cleaning the equipment

 Repairing or replacing faulty equipment

 Fitness for purpose checks

 Maintaining camera positions and focus

 Upgrading the system software

 Equipment warranties

 Maintenance logs and audit report

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The contractor shall offer complete solution for high-definition video encoding, recording, and display, designed as
an end-to-end system for the demands of professional IP video security.
B. System shall be Scalable to accept an unlimited number of HD and megapixel cameras, the system shall be
intelligent, easy-to-use approach to video security that provides greater control, enhanced operational flexibility,
improved management, and expanded recording, archiving, and integration capabilities.
C. Multiple users shall be able to simultaneously view the same camera view or sequence. The system shall use multi-
cast streaming video to allow multiple users to view the same video stream, without affecting the bandwidth of the
network.
D. All user interfaces in the system shall support Arabic language. Language preferences shall be associated with user
settings and shall follow the user and automatically load upon user log-in, regardless of the console or workstation.
E. The system provides for virtual matrix functionality, leveraging the IP network to switch any camera to any monitor
as well as transmit alarms and other system messages to any console on the network.
F. The system shall provide multi-level diagnostics of each component in all critical areas. These diagnostics shall be
reported to a diagnostic console for processing. The diagnostic data shall be capable of being scripted into actionable
events within the system. In addition, standard SNMP messages shall be capable of being mined by network
diagnostic systems such as OpenView and others for diagnostic traps and operational data.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 4 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

2.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

2.3.1 Network Storage Recorder (Storage Manager)

A. The network storage manager shall record video and audio streams from IP cameras and video encoders on the
network.
B. The network storage manager shall incorporate the server functions and storage elements into a purpose-built chassis.
C. The network storage manager shall use RAID parity across the storage drives to protect recorded data against a hard
disk drive failure.
D. The network storage manager shall use enterprise-level hard disk drives specifically rated for operation in RAID
systems.
E. The network storage manager chassis shall be designed for video surveillance recording applications and encompass
redundancy at all vital points:
Redundant, hot swappable power supply modules
Redundant, hot swappable system fans
Hot swappable O/S drive
Hot swappable CPU fans
F. The recorder shall utilize advanced network load balancing in which groups of cameras shall be automatically recorded
onto a storage pool consisting of multiple recorders. Camera assignments shall be automatically rotated to ensure that
all available storage is symmetrically utilized. In the unlikely event of a recorder failure, cameras shall be automatically
distributed
across the remaining recorders in the storage pool, providing NVR failover.
G. The network storage manager shall support a guaranteed recording throughput of 250 Mbps per storage device with a
minimum of 64 Mbps of read throughput.
H. The network storage manager shall support continuous, scheduled, alarm/event (including analytics alarms), motion,
and manual recording. Pre- and post-alarm periods shall be configurable up to the total capacity of the system.
I. The network storage manager shall have the ability to report all diagnostic events, including software status diagnostics
to a centralized user interface. In addition, SNMP traps shall be available for monitoring through a third-party SNMP
management console.
J. The network storage manager shall be fully managed from a remote workstation, including the ability to configure
settings and update firmware and software.
 The storage shall be sized appropriately to accommodate the following requirements.
- Type : Continuous, 24 hours/day
- Resolution : 1280X720 Resolution
- Frame rate : 15 Frames Per Seconds
- Real Time Recording : 120 days.
- Image Quality : Best
- - N+1 load balancing failure for 3 days.

2.3.2 Workstation

A. Provide workstation equipment, conforming to the specified requirements, with latest configuration as per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
B. The workstation shall be server-class personal computer with two dual-link DVI-I monitor outputs, USB
keyboard, and mouse. The workstation shall use a graphical user interface and keyboard/mouse that runs on 32-

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 5 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

bit Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business for monitoring live and recorded video, and virtual matrix
functionality that allows operators to see and respond to any alarm from any device on the network as well as
direct any camera to any monitor on the network.
C. The workstation shall allow administrators to configure devices, set up users, adjust network settings, and create
recording schedules. Permission to access these functions and all other system services will be configured to a
fine level of detail including the ability to restrict cameras from viewers, restrict PTZ operation, allow or restrict
digital zoom, Zone of Interest operations, or the ability to configure maps. In addition, user permissions shall
allow for designated
a. users to receive and respond to alarm and system diagnostic messages.
D. The system shall support Zone of Interest capability that allows a user to maintain the panoramic view of the
scene and designate zones of interest into which to independently zoom. These zones can then be located
anywhere on one of two monitors supported by the workstation and provide virtual camera views without
incurring additional network or processing load for supporting multiple cameras.
E. The workstation shall have advanced search capabilities, event logging, and alarm interface displays. The
workstation export video and still images in multiple formats, including QuickTime MPEG-4, H.264, AVI,
BMP, and JPG.
F. The workstation shall be capable of decoding up to 16 simultaneous 4CIF resolution, 30 images per second (ips)
video streams encoded in MPEG-4; or 12 simultaneous 4CIF resolution, 30 ips video streams encoded in H.264
baseline profile; or 2 simultaneous 1080p video streams encoded in H.264 baseline profile.
G. The workstation shall be capable of minimizing the CPU processing load and network bandwidth required by
the system, a scheme that shall automatically seek out and subscribe to a secondary stream from the cameras or
encoders at a lower resolution when the display is changed to a multichannel display.
H. The workstation shall support CCTV-style (joystick) keyboard control of pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ) cameras and
camera call-up.
I. The installer shall customer ensures that high definition video will not overload the workstation or other viewing
devices that are requesting live video streams, so as to reduce the impact on the underlying network. When the
screen configuration changes to a multi-camera view, the software shall automatically subscribes to a lower bit-
rate/resolution on a secondary stream, while maintaining full frame rate on the first.
J. The workstation application shall provide the ability to control and program any camera equipped with PTZ.
The PC workstation shall be capable of the following operations:
- Manually control the PTZ
- Set the pan/tilt home positions for manual or alarm activation
- Automatically control the cameras through an alarm trigger
- Ability to set multiple preset positions
- Ability to set multiple tours
- Remotely set and clear the movement limits of the pan/tilt mechanism from the control room, through a
telemetry unit at an outdoor camera site
- Adjust the zoom lens
- Ability to control the camera menu and set up the camera through the IP video security system

K. The video console display decode shall display IP streams from cameras and encoders across the network,
drives two HD (maximum of XVGA resolution, 2560 x 1600) monitors through DVI connections.
L. The video console display shall automatically subscribe to a lower resolution, lower bit-rate secondary stream
from the camera to reduce network bandwidth and CPU processing requirements as screen configurations
dictate. The video console display shall allow for simultaneous live and playback viewing of the same camera
on the same monitor.
M. The video console display shall support locking and unlocking archived video as well as exporting evidence-
worthy clips and snapshots to a USB solid state device or CD/DVD ROM.
a. The video console display shall be built upon the Linux® operating system.
N. The video console display shall support systemized diagnostics with a management server or user interface as
well as transmit.

2.3.3 High Definition Decoder

A. The HD video decoder shall support any digital video stream on the network and allow for the decoding of up to
32 simultaneous streams from any video encoder or recorder. It shall also allow for simultaneous and
independent viewing of both live and recorded video and decode MPEG-4 and H.264 baseline, main, and high
profile encoded video streams.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 6 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

B. Diagnostics shall be systemized with other system components. Any faults shall be reported to users
that have subscribed to diagnostic alarms regardless of where the user is located.

2.3.4 Keyboard

A. The keyboard controls shall have three modules in the keyboard. Modules shall be is capable of rotating to suit user
preferences. It keyboard modules shall include a variable speed, vector-solving joystick for precise pan/tilt/zoom (PTZ)
control, jog/shuttle for playback control and pattern control, a keypad for camera and monitor control, and a built-in speaker. It
shall have LED buttons that work in conjunction with the feature being used.
B. The keyboard shall be a part of an integrated system and configured so any number of keyboards can be added to the system.
When combined with user interfaces (UIs), network video recorders (NVRs), encoders, digital video recorders (DVRs), and
video consoles, the keyboard shall form an integral part of a complete network-based video control system.

2.3.5 CCTV Cameras

Indoor/ Outdoor PTZ High Definition Camera Dome

A. High Definition PTZ shall deliver crystal-clear, live streaming images over the Internet using a standard Web
browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox).It shall offer four times the resolution of standard
definition domes, and shall be an ideal solution to view details such as faces, license plates, tattoos, playing
cards (in casinos), or other specific features.
B. HD PTZ shall support High-Profile H.264 compression, a vast improvement in quality and 20 times more
efficient than JPEG.
C. The HD PTZ dome system shall be featured with open architecture connectivity for third-party software
recording solutions allowing integration into virtually any IP-based HD system. HD PTZ shall be ease of
installation and ease of maintenance.
D. HD PTZ features shall include variable speed capabilities, which range from a smooth, fast pan motion of 400
degrees per second to a smooth speed of 0.1 degree per second. The system shall capable of continuous 360
degrees rotation, and it has an “auto flip” feature that allows the dome to rotate 180 degrees and reposition itself
for uninterrupted viewing of any subject that passes directly beneath the dome.

a. The outdoor fixed HD dome system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance
specifications.
i. Up to 1280 x 960 Resolution
ii. 4:3 or 16:9 Aspect Ratio; 960p at 20 Images per Second (ips), 720p at 30 ips
iii. 1.3 Megapixel (MPx), 18X Optical, Wide Dynamic Range (WDR) Camera
b. - Light Sensitivity f/1.6; 2,850°K; SNR >24dB Color (33 ms) 0.70 lux, Color (250 ms) 0.07 lux, Mono
(33 ms) 0.25 lux, Mono (250 ms) 0.02 lux
i. Ability to Control and Monitor Video Over IP Networks
ii. Autotracking and Adaptive Motion Detection.
c. - The PTZ cameras shall have video analytic built in with the camera and not limited to abandone
object, camera sabotage, directional motion, loitering detection, object counting, object removal &
stopped vehicles.
i. 2 Simultaneous Video Streams: Dual H.264
ii. 360° Continuous Pan Rotation at 400° per Second
d. - Supported Protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP (Unicast, Multicast IGMP), UPnP, DNS, DHCP,
RTP, NTP, and More
i. Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af
ii. USB Expansion Slots for Alarms and Audio Accessories
iii. 16 Preset Tours, 255 Dome Presets, 8 Privacy Zones

e. All models shall be IP66 rated and Vandal Resistant (IK10 rated)

Outdoor Megapixel IP Day/Night Camera in an Outdoor Enclosure Wall Mounted

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 7 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

A. The network camera shall offer dual video streams with up to 1.2 megapixel resolution (1280 x 960) in progressive scan
format. It shall provide extended Wide Dynamic Range (WDR), low-light performance, and anti-bloom technology.
B. The network camera shall provide a removable, local storage medium (Micro SD) for scheduled and event-based
recording of images. It shall provide advanced low-light capabilities with sensitivity down to 0.0013 lux.
C. The network camera (day/night model) shall have a removable IR cut filter mechanism for increased sensitivity in
lowlight installations. IR cut filter removal shall be configurable through a Web browser.
D. The network camera shall support two simultaneous, configurable video streams. H.264, compression formats shall be
available for primary and secondary streams with selectable Unicast and Multicast protocols.
E. The network camera shall support industry standard Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af to supply power to the
camera over the network, 24 VAC power as an option.
F. The network camera shall provide the Adaptive Motion analytic to intelligently detect motion within the field of vision
and trigger an alarm. It shall provide Camera Sabotage analytics to detect changes in the camera’s field of view, including
obstruction of the lens (examples include by cloth, spray paint, or a lens cap cover) and unauthorized movement of the
camera. Such behaviors shall trigger an alarm.
G. The camera shall have video analytic built in with the camera and not limited to abandone object, camera sabotage,
directional motion, loitering detection, object counting, object removal & stopped vehicles.
H. Camera shall be rated IP66 and Vandal Resistant.

Outdoor Weatherproof Enclosure

A. The outdoor enclosure shall allow the use of cameras with vari-focal length lenses and shall allow for outdoor
applications. The outdoor enclosure shall have a front-hinged lid to provide easy access to the removable camera sled and
shall have two adjustable glands on the bottom of the enclosure for easy installation of the power and video cables.
Enclosure shall include heater- defroster, blower, and sun shroud. The construction shall be Extruded and die-cast
aluminum and finish powder coat, IP66 and Vandal Resistant

Indoor Megapixel IP Day/Night Dome Camera Vandal Proof

A. The camera shall be vandal proof and tamper resistant with IP65 rating.
B. The network camera shall offer dual video streams with up to 1.3 megapixel resolution (1280 X 1024) in progressive scan
format. An alarm input and relay output shall be built in for integration with hard wired external sensors.
C. The network camera shall provide a removable, local storage medium (Micro SD) for scheduled and event-based
recording of images.
D. The network camera shall provide advanced low-light capabilities for day/night models with sensitivity down to 0.12 lux
in color and 0.03 lux in black-white.Up to 20 Images per Second (ips) at 1280 x 1024 and 30 images per second at 1280
X720.
E. The network camera shall have a removable IR cut filter mechanism for increased sensitivity in low-light installations.
IRcut filter removal shall be configurable through a Web browser.
F. The network camera shall support two simultaneous, configurable video streams. H.264 compression formats shall be
available for primary and secondary streams with selectable Unicast and multicast protocols. The streams shall be
configurable in a variety of frame rates and bit rates.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 8 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

G. The network camera shall support industry standard Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af to supply power to the
camera over the network, if shall also offer a 24 VAC power
f. input for optional use.
H. The network camera shall use a standard Web browser interface for remote administration and configuration of camera
parameters.
I. The network camera shall provide Camera Sabotage analytics to detect changes in the camera’s field of view, including
obstruction of the lens (examples include by cloth, spray paint, or a lens cap cover) and unauthorized movement of the
camera. Such behaviors shall trigger an alarm.
J. The camera shall have video analytic built in with the camera and not limited to abandone object, camera sabotage,
directional motion, loitering detection, object counting, object removal & stopped vehicles

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

A. Examine conditions, with the installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the
performance of the CCTV system work.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cable. Check raceways, cables trays, and other elements for compliance with
space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways.
C. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored,
deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable
if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet
boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
E. Grounding: Provide signal circuit grounding recommended by manufacturer.
F Equipment: install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to the approval of the Engineer. Mount
equipment in alignment with other building fixtures and fix firmly in place with all supports and fastenings secured.
G. Interference Protection: equipment is to be installed to prevent electromagnetic, electrostatic or other outside interference
impairing system performance.
H. Accessibility: equipment is to be installed to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. Minor
deviations from the Drawings may be made, but no changes are to be made without prior approval.
I. Make good surfaces of equipment damaged during installation, using touch-up paint provided by equipment manufacturer,
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 9 of 10
 SECTION 28 21 00
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM

J. Routing of video signal cables, power and control cables, in general, is to be in separate raceways.

3.3 GROUNDING

Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest extent possible,
ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled

components and equipment installation and supervise pre-testing, testing, and adjusting of television equipment.
B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled and that interconnecting
wires and terminals are identified.
C. Record test results.
D. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.
E. System test is to include light box mylar test pattern for random camera locations, for measurement of resolution,
streaking, ringing, interlace, shading, scanning, aspect ratio and gray scale.' H&V wedges of resolution chart are to be
arranged to measure 200 to 1600 lines.
F. Test Equipment: provide diagnostic equipment required to perform system tests and measurements including
function generator, impedance bridge, oscilloscope, frequency spectrum analyzer, chart recorder, digital voltmeter, dB
meter and wave form monitor.

3.5 TRAINING

A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating, troubleshooting,
servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum of three hours training.

B. B. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days advance notice

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration.

3.7 CERTIFICATES AND TESTING

The complete installation shall be tested and inspected to ensure that it complies with the requirements of this Specification,
the IEE Wiring Regulations, British Standards and MOI. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the IEE Wiring
Regulations and to the satisfaction of the MOI.

END OF SECTION 282300

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 21 00
Page 10 of 10
 SECTION 28 31 11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

SECTION 283111

ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM AND EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. The individual buildings shall be provided with analogue addressable Fire alarm and emergency lighting fixture and all
are interfaced with common FAP which is located in fire command room as indicated in the drawings.

B. The system shall be analogue addressable detection/alarm system, 24 volt direct current, zoned, non-coded,
annunciated, electrically supervised, complete with fire alarm control centre, remote panels, alarm initiating devices,
alarm signaling devices, wiring and all required accessories.

C. The system shall be capable of having all initiation devices in alarm at the same time and integrated with FACP.

D. All equipment proposed for use shall be UL approved with third party certification and shall not be mixed with other
manufactures.

E. The localized self contained emergency and exit lights shall be provided as shown in the drawings

F. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to complete and make ready
for system operation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

1.3 APPLICABLE CODE AND STANDARDS

A. NFPA-70, 72, 101, 170 & 5000 : National Fire Alarm Code

B. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and FM Factory Mutual Systems

C. Local Civil Defense Authority.

1.4 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions for system.

B. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections, views,
control and power wiring diagram.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 31 11 - Page 1 of 7
 SECTION 28 31 11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant International Testing
Authorities.

B. Manufacturer Firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

1.6 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall submit the Guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP)

A. The Fire Alarm Control Panels shall be the Analogue addressable system, receiving and analyzing signals from fire
sensors, providing audible and visual information to the user, initiating automatic alarm response sequences and
providing the means by which the user interacts with the system.

B. Each FACP shall be complete with a network card and with peer to peer communication.

C. All FACP shall have 40 character liquid crystal display, UL listed, Maximum 127 address points per loop, Power
supply and charger, Ground fault isolation from front panel, Battery supervision, Strip printers, standardized software
and fully field programmable and editable.

D. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need for special tools or
electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of electronic integrated circuits.

E. All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Battery backup for configuration is not acceptable.

F. The programming functions shall be enabled with a 4-digit password that may be defined specifically for the system
when it is installed.

G. FACP shall be with Nonvolatile memory and Re-programming shall be possible on site without the use of "off-board"
program, modems or special tools.

H. The 'Function Keys' Display Action Keypad and the Entry Keypad shall be user friendly including Enabling and
Disabling circuits, turn control points “On” or “Off”, set time and date, display historical logs etc.

I. The alarm verification Function shall be programmable and each sensor shall be capable of selection for verification
during field programming of the system.

J. The FACP shall have capability of isolating any device, zone or devices, or loop of devices in the system may be
enabled or isolated through the system keypad.

K. The FACP shall have capability to perform a one person test by device, zone of devices or loop of devices.

L. The FACP shall have capability of system status reports, System history recording & reporting and automatic senor
maintenance alert
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 31 11 - Page 2 of 7
 SECTION 28 31 11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

M. The FACP one loop shall capable of accepting up to 127 Addressable input and output devices per loop

N. The FACP shall have provision to drive and monitor up to 2 repeater panels providing a repeat of the indications on the
CP display.

O. The FACP shall have provision for the connection, either locally via a parallel port or remotely via a serial port, of 40-
character line printer to provide the alarm summary with date and time of occurrence of the alarms.

P. The FACP housings shall be wall mounted complete with cable entries, fixings, knock-outs, aluminum body, light grey
or beige color, hinged front cover, protection IP43.

Q. The FACP shall monitor the status of all devices on the addressable loops for fire, short-circuit fault, open-circuit fault,
incorrect addressing, unauthorized device removal or exchange, pre-alarm condition and contaminated detector
condition and shall be printed on the printer on demand.

R. The FACP shall monitor the status of all internal connection and interfaces including charger, battery and remote
signaling functions and shall be printed on the printer on demand.

S. The FACP shall provide the necessary outputs to separately operate two monitored circuits of common system
sounders and each output shall be capable of driving a sounder load of up to 1Amps.

T. The FACP shall be capable, via a suitable addressable contact monitor module, of monitoring and indicating the status
of auxiliary units such as a remote signaling transmitter.

2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. Up on actuation of fire the respective FACP shall show normal green LED is to extinguish and alarm red LED is to
light, an audible signal is to sound.

B. The respective FACP display shall give message indicating the device initiated; number of messages waiting, type of
alarm and the time alarm occurred.

C. The FACP display shall also give message indicating the device initiated; number of messages waiting, type of alarm
and the time alarm occurred.

D. The alarm indicator shall flash until the alarm is acknowledged. If a subsequent alarm is received after
acknowledgment, the alarm is to sound again. The operator is to acknowledge the alarm by pressing a dedicated button.
Operator is to acknowledge all pending alarms before the buzzer is to silence.

E. Automatically shutdown all designated mechanical equipment serving the areas, where alarm initiated.

F. Automatically initiate to start the extinguisher if any; dial the Civil Defense authority.

G. Printer is to print text message on the event log indicating the device initiated alarm, time and date associated with
alarm.

2.3 POWER SUPPLY

A. The power supply shall be installed in FACP with adequately sized to power all equipment shown on the drawing with
a minimum of 20% spare capacity.

B. The power supply shall be suitable for 240V 50 Hz input and the output shall be 24V DC for all supervisory and
control functions.

C. The standby battery shall be Ni-Cd rechargeable, sealed maintenance free, enclosed in the aluminum housing and shall
have a minimum life of 5 years.
WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 31 11 - Page 3 of 7
 SECTION 28 31 11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

D. The ampere-hour capacity shall be adequate to operate the system under supervisory conditions for 24 hours with the
AC power disconnected and to sound all audible alarms for 30 consecutive minutes at the end of this period.

2.4 GENERAL ALARM INDICATING DEVICES

A. The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by mean or plug-in addressable bases and have a
mechanical device enabling the base to accept any of ionization smoke, optical smoke or heat detector.

B. The detector plug-in bases shall incorporate the optional feature of being able to lock the detectors in place once
plugged in.

C. Addressable detectors and modules must be able to transmit to the C.P's a pre-set and unique identifier to detect
unauthorized changes in the system configuration.

D. This equipment shall be designed to ensure compatibility between the detector and addressable module.

E. The system shall able to connect and mix automatic detectors, manual call points and addressable units.

2.5 OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTORS

A. The detector shall be capable of detecting visible combustion gases emanating from fires, UL listed and incorporate
screens designed to prevent all but the very small insects from entering the sensing chamber.

B. The detector fin structure shall be designed to totally eliminate the effect of very small insects such as thunder flies and
designed to have high resistance to contamination and corrosion.

C. The detector shall include RFI screening and feed-through connecting components to minimize the effect of radiated
and conducted electrical interferences.

D. The detector shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to provide indication of alarm actuation.

E. The design of the detectors sensing chamber shall be optimized to minimize the effect of dust deposits over a period of
time.

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. The detector shall be capable of detecting rapid rise in temperature and fixed absolute temperatures and UL listed.

B. The detector shall employ two heat sensing elements with different thermal characteristics to provide a rate of rise
dependent response.

C. The detector shall include RFI screening and feed-through connecting components to minimize the effect of radiated
and conducted electrical interferences.

D. The detector shall be rated 60 degree C and 90 degree C as specified on the drawing.

E. The detector shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the outside, to provide indication of alarm actuation.

2.7 COMBINED SMOKE AND HEAT DETECTORS

A. Combine smoke and heat detector shall comprise of two chambers. One chamber containing the photoelectric smoke
detector and the other chamber shall contain the heat detector.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 31 11 - Page 4 of 7
 SECTION 28 31 11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

B. The smoke detector shall utilize a horizontal optical bench construction which houses the detector and the optical
sensor. The detector shall be arranged for radial detection of forward scattered light.

C. The heat detector shall operate at fixed temperatures set at 57 oC, 71 oC or 99 oC to trigger the alarm. The setting shall
depend on the application and as specified in the Project Documentation.

D. The detector shall be fully operational after initiation of an alarm without any maintenance.

2.8 DUCT MOUNTED SMOKE SETECTORS

A. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided in the main return air duct adjacent to each air handling unit (AHU).

B. They shall be of the duct mounted type and initiate alarm in case of a developing fire. These shall be provided with two
sampling tubes. The first, an inlet tube for intake of air from the duct to the sensor assembly. The second, an exhaust
tube to allow air to leave the assembly.

C. Duct smoke detectors shall be interlocked with the air handling unit motor and volt freecontact shall also be provided to
raise an alarm on the main fire alarm panel. Installation of duct mounted detectors shall be approved by the Air
Conditioning Section of QGEWC.

2.9 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL BREAK GLASS CALL POINT

A. The call point shall monitor and signal to the FACP the status of a switch operated by a 'break glass' assembly.

B. The call point shall be UL listed double action station push type, addressable, capable of monitoring at least three slave
conventional manual call points and capable of being mounted in weather-proof protection to IP 65.

C. The call point shall incorporate a mechanism to interrupt the normal addressable loop scan to provide an alarm
response within less than 1 second.

D. The call point shall be field programmable to trigger either an alert or an evacuate response from the CP and tested by
activation of the Pull Lever.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE MONITORING MODULE

A. The module shall provide monitoring of the status of switched input signals from either normally open or normally
closed contacts.

B. The module shall provide a red LED indication when the contact has operated.

C. The module shall be capable of deriving its power directly from the addressable loop and enclosed in a pre-fabricated
enclosure (IP42 rating).

2.11 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

A. The module shall provide control to audible and/or relay functions for bell units, the magnetic door holders, etc.

B. The module shall be capable of delivering its power directly off the addressable loop or via separate 24V supply from
the control panels.

C. The module shall be enclosed in a pre-fabricated enclosure (IP 42 rating).

D. The module relay contacts shall be 2 Amp @ 30 VDC (Resistive) and 1 Amp @ 30 VDC (Inductive).

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 31 11 - Page 5 of 7
 SECTION 28 31 11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

2.12 LINE ISOLATOR MODULE

A. The module shall provide protection on the addressable loop by automatically disconnecting the section of wiring
between two modules where short-circuit has occurred.

B. The module shall derive power directly from addressable loop and have LED indication that the module has tripped.

C. The module shall be installed between every zone, between every monitoring and control module and with a maximum
of fifteen devices between isolators.

2.13 SOUNDER OR HORN SPEAKERS

A. Sounder or Horn speakers shall have high efficiency compression drivers and matching transformers shall be 70 volt,
with taps at ¼, ½, 1 and 2 watts, factory set at 1 watt.

B. Frequency response shall be 400 to 4,000 Hertz, and output shall be 90 dB at 3000 mm with a 2 watt input.

2.14 WIRING

A. The wiring type and size shall be as indicated in the drawings and if any modification required as per the latest
regulation of local civil defense, the contractor shall replace the same without any additional cost

B. All wiring shall be fire Resistance cable with red outer sheath for fire alarm and emergency lighting system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as
recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.

B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in
unfinished areas.

C. All raceways shall be run in concealed areas to minimize exposure in public corridors and spaces.

D. Wiring shall be fire resistance cable run in PVC conduit for embedded installation and in GI conduit for exposed
installation.

E. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period.

F. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination
and physical damage.

G. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote repeater panels shall be flush mounted when
located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.

3.2 TESTING AND CLOSE OUT

A. Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire
alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system.

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 31 11 - Page 6 of 7
 SECTION 28 31 11
ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

B. Provide instruction as required for operating the system. "Hands-on" demonstrations of the operation of all system
components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided.

C. At the final inspection, a manufacturer-trained representative shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in
every respect.

D. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a typewritten "Sequence of Operation"
to the Owner.

3.2. Manufacturers:

Refer to list of Approved Manufacture.

END OF SECTION 283111

WR - RES/19-20
Technical Specification-Rev.00 SECTION 28 31 11 - Page 7 of 7
 SECTION 28 31 73
EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

SECTION 283173

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

A. Works under this section shall be governed by conditions of contract and other relevant applicable sections.

B. This specification to be read in conjunction with QCS 2014 and in case of conflict between contract documents, and the
standards and codes compliance shall be the more stringent amongst the above.

C. This system shall be constructed by a specialist contractor.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORKS

A. This section includes independent emergency voice alarm (EVAC) system provided all the essential EVAC
functionality – such as system supervision, spare amplifier switching, loudspeaker line surveillance, digital message
management and a fireman’s panel interface – shall be combined.

B. System/work is deemed to include all items of work needed for the project. Minor items, which do not appear in the
specification and which are necessary for normal operation of the system, are implied as ancillary equipment and are
deemed to have been indicated.

C. The system shall comply to the following standards:

1. NFPA 72 – (latest edition)
2. NFPA 101 – LIFE SAFETY CODE
3. BS 5839 PART 8 Code of practice for the design, installation and servicing of voice alarm system and EN80649
4. IEC 60849 Sound Systems for emergency purposes
5. Qatar Civil Defense Department latest regulation
6. Product shall be an approved brand by the QCDD and shall be either TUV or UL listed

1.3 MATERIALS AND DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s data and installation for system.

B. Detailed Bill of material indicating the model number, clear description, quantity and country of origin for all of the
proposed equipment.

C. Contractor shall submit dimensional layout on architectural background drawings complete with sections and views.

D. Detailed Voltage Drop Calculation for the DC Lines taken into consideration the Current Consumption feeding the
speakers and Amplifier sizes.

E. Submit a detailed point by point compliance statement with this specification. Where the proposed system does not
comply, or accomplish the stated function or specification in a manner different from that described and specified, a
full description of the deviation shall be provided. Where a full description is not provided, it shall be assumed that the
proposed system does not comply with the requirements in the specification.

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 28 31 73
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 1 of 6
 SECTION 28 31 73
EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. The contractor shall supply high quality materials, fully type tested and certified by the relevant international testing
authorities.

B. Manufacturer firm shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of system of types, and capacities required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Manufactures shall be certified to
ISO 9000 or equivalent.

C. Mixing of major components from different manufacturer, to make one system, shall not be permitted. All components
shall by supplied from a single source/manufacturer.

1.5 GURANTEE AND WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall submit the guarantee certificate for the equipment furnished under these specifications against
defective parts and workmanship.

B. The guarantee shall be under terms of the manufacturers and dealers’ standard warranties for a period of not less than
two years from date of completion certificate and include labor and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Voice alarm system shall feature N zones to match with the fire detection zones, each served by one monitored
circuit (CLASS A Wiring).

B. These zones shall be accessed from a fully monitored zoned paging emergency microphone, high quality pre-recorded
Alert, Evacuation and Test messages and zoned Touch Screen paging microphone.

C. A fully monitored, processor-driven, DSP-based controller system shall route the signals as required and also monitor
the connected amplifiers and loudspeaker circuits.

D. In the event of mains AC failure, the system shall automatically switch on an integral fully monitored DC power
supply, this is sized to support the system for 24 hours in standby conditions and for a further 30 minutes’ use at full
load.

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. General: provide equipment using all solid-state components fully rated for continuous duty at the ratings indicated or
specified. Select equipment for normal operation on input power supplied at 240V, 50Hz

B. The design, supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and maintenance of the EVAC System shall include,
but not limited to the following:

1. Recessed mount (ceiling), surface mount, column and / or horn speakers, sound projectors, box and bi-
directional box speaker’s c/w line matching transformers.

2. Equipment rack complete with forced air ventilation fan(s), mounting brackets blank panels, terminal boards,
etc.

3. Main equipment and all associated auxiliary equipment;

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 28 31 73
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 2 of 6
 SECTION 28 31 73
EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

4. Distribution cabling, including fire rated cables, cable ladders, racks and Cable supporting systems (cable
trucking and concealed metal conduits)

5. All other works and materials necessary for the efficient operation of the whole audio system Complete with
power supply requirements and surge arrestors and filters.

C. WIRING:

Wiring and cables are to be in conduits and raceways complying and in accordance with section (260533) of the
specification.
1. All connections between the Audio Units (DSP) must be carried out with the Fire Rated Twisted Pair Cables.

2. The cable must maintain its circuit and insulation integrity for 90 minutes under flames tested and third party
approved to IEC 60331-11 and -25 (maintaining circuit integrity) as well as EN 50200 standards.

3. All Speaker cables associated with the fire alarm installation shall be fire resistant 2 cores 2.5 sq. mm screened
type. Cables shall comply with BS 762:1933 and BS 6387

D. POWER AMPLIFIERS:

1. Primary amplifiers are to be sized to accommodate all the speakers shown on the drawings, with 20% spare
capacity included. Back-up amplifiers to be provided in each EVAC control panel.

2. Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, supervised 70 or 100 VMS speaker circuit which is suitable for
connection of emergency speaker appliances.

3. Standby Audio amplifiers shall be provided that automatically sense the failure of a primary amplifier and
automatically program themselves to select and de-multiplex the same audio information channel of the failed
primary amplifier and fully replace the function of the failed amplifier.

4. In the event of a total loss of audio data communications, all amplifiers will default to the local “EVAC” tone
generator channel. If the local panel has an alarm condition, then all amplifiers will sound the EVAC signal on
their connected speaker circuits.

5. Audio amplifiers shall automatically detect a short circuit condition on the connected speaker circuit wiring and
shall inhibit itself from driving into that short circuit condition.

6. Technical performance:

a. Power rating: sufficient to feed all evacuation loudspeakers connected to the power amplifier including
20% spare.
b. Frequency response : 40 Hz to 4,000Hz fully loaded.
c. No load to full load differentiation less than 3 db.
d. Noise 65 dB below rated output.
e. Distortion less then 0.5%
f. Output voltage to be 70/100 volt constant voltage distribution configuration.

E. VOICE MESSAGES:

1. The voice messages shall include an EVAC message, Drill Message and an All Clear Message.
2. The text of all the messages will be custom made to the approval of the QCDD, must be with English and
Arabic language and must form part of the fire safety plan for the building.
3. The EVAC message will be configured such that the floor of alarm can be incorporated into the message.
4. Voice splicing will allow the EVAC voice message to indicate what floor or area is actually in alarm in a high-
rise building.
5. All messages will be professionally recorded in a sound studio before being digitized.
WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 28 31 73
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 3 of 6
 SECTION 28 31 73
EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

F. RACKS AND CABINETS:

1. Cabinets are to be 19-inch frame, totally enclosed with side and rear panels removable, and cable
entrance at rear, top or bottom. Surface finish is to be textured and of approved color. Frames are to
be anodized aluminum sections. Each frame is to be provided with ventilation rack, including
automatically operated fan with thermostatic control. Suitable ventilation openings are to be
provided. Enclosure is to be IP 42 to IEC 144 for indoor installation and at least 32 U for Master
VA rack.

G. LOUDSPEAKERS:

1. Ceiling Loudspeakers

a. the ceiling loudspeakers shall be suitable for false-ceiling mounting, and shall be
specially designed for voice alarm application. They shall be installed as specified and shown
on the drawings.

b. All loudspeakers shall meet the requirements of BS 5839 part 8, complete with ceramic
terminal blocks and thermal links.

c. The ceiling loudspeakers shall high quality cone type and fitted with front metal grille and
circular baffle plate for mounting in a suspended ceiling. A sample of the loudspeaker shall be
submitted to the engineer for approval.

d. The ceiling loudspeakers shall be fitted with rear fire-dome.

e. The ceiling loudspeakers shall provide the following minimum performance:

i) frequency response 100Hz – 10kHz
ii) Characteristic sensitivity level (SPL @ 1m on axis for 1W rms input) > 92dB
iii) Input voltage: 100V or 70V
iv) Rated power input 6watt rams (with tapping 1.5, 3 & 6 watt)
v) Minimum coverage angle (included angle between –6dB
Points on- axis level 90º @ 1 KHz

2. Wall speaker

a. Speakers shall be provided with a resonating board and an aluminum grille for universal application for
flush or surface-mounted enclosures.
b. The speaker shall be a high-performance type and shall be provided with auto-transformer with taps for
1/4, 1/2 and 1/1 output.
c. The normal rated capacity shall be 6 W, if not otherwise specified in the Project Documentation.
d. The sound pressure shall be approximately 100 dB

H. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1. All loudspeakers shall be fire resistant, either by inherent construction or by fire resistant enclosure.
2. The design and installation shall provide the maximum practicable protection of the loudspeaker line during a
fire.
3. All loudspeaker enclosures shall be fitted with twin threaded inserts to accommodate 20mmglands for direct
entry and exit of mineral-insulated copper sheathed cables complying with BS 6207.
4. Any loudspeaker types for which this requirement cannot be met shall be clearly identified within the tender.
WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 28 31 73
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 4 of 6
 SECTION 28 31 73
EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

5. The colors and finishes of all loudspeakers shall be approved by the consultant. External loudspeakers shall be
weatherproof, with ingress protection meeting at least IP54 in accordance with BS 60529 (IEC 529).

PART 3 - EXAMINATION

3.1 Examination

A. Examine conditions, with the installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the
performance of the Voice Evacuation System.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: install system in accordance with applicable requirements. Install equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Wiring methods use special cables in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Conceal wiring.
Raceways are deemed to be included whether shown or not.

C. Impedance and Level Matching: carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels
at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

D. Control circuit wiring provide number of conductors as recommended by system manufacturer to provide
control functions indicated or specified.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow
surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings so designed and installed
as not to damage the cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 1 meter and not more than 15 cm from
every cabinet, box, or fitting.

F. Wiring within enclosures: provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to
terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.

G. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures.

H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: use color coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking
tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in co-ordination with system wiring diagrams.

3.3 GROUNDING
A. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize to the greatest
extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Protesting: upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform
complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance of the system to the requirements of

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 28 31 73
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 5 of 6
 SECTION 28 31 73
EMERGENCY VOICE ALARM SYSTEM

the Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or
damaged items with new, and retest until materials satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

B. Testing: upon completion of retesting, notify the Architect a minimum of 10 days in advance of acceptance
test performance. Schedule and conduct tests in his presence. Provide a written record of tests results.

C. Operational Test: perform an operational system test to verify conformance of system to these
Specifications. Perform tests that include originating program and page material at microphone outlets, all
preamplifier program inputs, and all other inputs. Observe sound reproduction for proper volume levels and
freedom from noise.

D. Signal-To-Noise Ratio Test: measure the ratio of signal to noise of the complete system at normal gain
settings using the following procedure:

E. Inspection: make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labelled, and interconnecting
wires and terminals are identified. Provide a list of final tap settings of speaker line matching transformers.

F. Retesting: rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at
Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets the Specifications and complies
with applicable standards. Provide a written record of all retest results.

3.5 TRAINING

A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating,
troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of the system. Provide a minimum of three hours
training.

B. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least 15 days’ advance notice

C. the contractor shall prepare fully detailed operation and maintenance manuals for every individual item
related to the fire installations.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Prior to final acceptance, clean system components and protect from damage and deterioration.

3.7 WARRANTY

The Contractor shall warrant the complete system wiring and equipment to be free from inherent mechanical and
electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the completion and certified test or from the date of first
beneficial use.

END OF SECTION 283173

WR - RES/19-20 SECTION 28 31 73
Technical Specification-Rev.00 Page 6 of 6